Basic Modeling 2

Engineering

Tekla Structures 19.1

2013 Engineering Basic Training
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Copyright© 1992-2013 Tekla Corporation. All rights reserved.

This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the
Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other
provisions, the License Agreement sets certain warranties for the Software and this Manual,
disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the Software,
and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. Please refer to the License
Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights.

In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any
portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
full extent permitted by law.

Tekla, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other
countries. Other product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be
trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party product or brand, Tekla
does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and disclaims
any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.

Elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent
applications in the European Union and/or other countries.
Contents

3 Basic Modeling 2 ............................................................................... 3

In This Lesson .......................................................................................................... 3
3.1 Start Tekla Structures .............................................................................................. 4
3.2 Create a New Model – Eng_Model ......................................................................... 5
Start a New Model.................................................................................................... 5
Save the Model ........................................................................................................ 6
Setting Up Job Specific Information ........................................................................ 7
3.3 Create the Grid ......................................................................................................... 9
Create the Grid ......................................................................................................... 9
Rotate Grid ............................................................................................................. 11
Set Work Plane to a New Position ........................................................................ 12
Fit Work Area ......................................................................................................... 12
Verifying Grids against Reference Files ............................................................... 13
Create Plane Views along Gridlines ..................................................................... 14
Create View on Skewed Grid ................................................................................ 15
3.4 Create Foundation System .................................................................................... 16
Model Pad Footings ............................................................................................... 17
Model Strip Footings .............................................................................................. 19
Model Concrete Columns ...................................................................................... 21
Model Concrete Beams ......................................................................................... 23
Model Foundation Walls ........................................................................................ 26
Model the Main Level Slabs .................................................................................. 29
3.5 Create Steel Framing System ............................................................................... 31
Model Steel Columns at Grid Line 1 ..................................................................... 31
Model a Steel Rafter at Grid Line 1....................................................................... 33
Establish Work Points for Roof Elements ............................................................. 33
Model Roof Bracing & Joists ................................................................................. 37
Modify Columns...................................................................................................... 40
Model Eave Bracing ............................................................................................... 41
3.6 Create Mezzanine Framing ................................................................................... 41
Model Interior Columns .......................................................................................... 42
Model Mezzanine Beams ...................................................................................... 43
Model Vertical Bracing ........................................................................................... 47
3.7 Model Quality Review ............................................................................................ 48
Using Selection Filters ........................................................................................... 48
Using Interactive Reports ...................................................................................... 50
Using Object Representation ................................................................................ 51

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-i
 Engineering: Basic Modeling 2
3-ii Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
3 Basic Modeling 2

In This Lesson
In this lesson we will cover some preliminary tasks that you need to complete before starting
to model a real project. We will create a new model and recap the basic functions introduced
in lesson 2. After that, you will learn some additional basic functions.
You will learn how to:
Set up project information
Define part properties
Work in true planes (sloped, skewed)
Create your own select filters
Verify model integrity

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-3
3.1 Start Tekla Structures
To start Tekla Structures, click the Windows Start button. Navigate through All Programs >
Tekla Structures 19.1 > Tekla Structures 19.1. Alternately, you can double-click on the
desktop icon Tekla Structures 19.1.
The login dialog box will open. This login allows you to select the environment you want to
work in – typically US Imperial or US Metric, depending on your installation. You will
also be able to select your role. The role options in Tekla Structures tailor the program to fit
your needs and help you more easily and quickly find the settings you need.
For this training, we will be working in the US Imperial Environment, using the Engineering
Role and your available license.

1. Make sure these options are selected, and click OK.

The modeling interface is now opened. At first, most of the
menu options and icons are gray, indicating that they are
inactive. When you open an existing model or create a new
model the icons and available menu options will become
active.
You can open or create models from the Welcome to Tekla
Structures dialog box, or you can use the File menu or
toolbar icons.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-4 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
3.2 Create a New Model – Eng_Model
To start a new model, you first need to create an empty model database with a unique name.
In this lesson we will use the name Eng_Model followed by your initials.

Start a New Model

1. Select New model from the Welcome to Tekla Structures dialog box, select File >
New… from the pull-down menu (keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+N), or select the New icon in
the standard toolbar to open the New dialog box.

2. Use the Browse… button to select your model storage directory. The full path of the
model folder is shown in the dialog box field after selection.

The Engineering folder should have been created with the setup files provided as part of
this training. Contact your instructor for further information on obtaining these files.

3. Tekla Structures suggests the name New Model for the model. Name the model
Eng_Model-yourinitials (Adding your initials to the model name helps us to quickly
review your model when you submit it for review).
4. Select the ENG_BaseTemplate for the model template option if it is not already provided
as the Model template.

You can use model templates as a basis when creating new models. Model templates
consist of predefined settings. The ENG_BaseTemplate, for example, provides custom
dialog boxes and selection and view filters for engineering specific data. The
ENG_PlateworkModel is provided as a plate work example.

When using a model template, all projects are started in Single-user mode. The model
can later be opened in Multi-user mode, if desired. The Multi-User function in Tekla
Structures allows multiple users in one model. This is particularly useful when a
number of modelers are working on one contract.

5. Click OK to create the new model.

The menus and icons activate and the model name appears in the title bar of the Tekla
Structures window.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-5
 Every model must have a unique name. Tekla Structures does not allow duplicate model
names within the same folder. Do not use special marks ( / \ ; : |, etc. ) in model
names.

You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, Tekla
Structures prompts you to save that model before exiting.

The Views dialog box (also called the Views List) is shown with the standard 3d view listed in
the Named views panel.
1. To open the 3d view, select it in the Named views panel and use the arrow button to
“push” it to the Visible views: panel. Alternatively, you can double-click on the listing to
move it to the other panel.

The arrow button is handy when opening or closing several views at once, you can use
the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple views and move them between the Named views
and Visible views panels.

2. Close the Views dialog box by clicking OK.

The default 3d view and grid are shown.

Dash-and-dot lines show the projections of the grids that are visible on the view plane. Tekla
Structures indicates the work area of a view using a green, dashed line box.
For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Modeling Guide >
Setting up the workspace.

Save the Model

1. Select File > Save from the pull-down menu (keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+S) or select the
Save icon in the Standard toolbar.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-6 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Remember to save your model often, and always save when opening a new model or
exiting a Tekla Structures model.

Tekla Structures also includes an auto save feature that backs up and saves your work
automatically at set intervals. To set the Autosave intervals select Tools > Options >
Options …: General.

After you make any desired changes, remember to click the Apply button to retain the
changes – the OK button does the same but also closes the dialog box.
For more information on saving and auto saving see Tekla User Assistance: Home >
Instructions > Modeling Guide > Creating 3D models > Saving a model.

There are several ways to execute commands in Tekla Structures:

Icons
Commands in main pull-down menu
Commands in pop-up menu

By default, all of the commands are found in pull-down menus and most of them in the
icons. A pop-up menu appears when you click the right mouse button (right-click). If
you have an object selected, the commands on the pop-up menu relate to that object.
In this training manual we will use the context-sensitive right-click menu to activate
some commands.
For more information on Tekla Structures screen layout and toolbars see Tekla
User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Basics of Tekla Structures >
Interface overview.

Setting Up Job Specific Information

Prior to adding any parts, we will set up the necessary job specific information for the model:
Project properties
Preferences
Part properties

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-7
 Project Properties
Project properties are common to all drawings and can be used to fill in typical information in
the title blocks.
1. Open the Project Properties dialog box by selecting File > Project Properties… from
the menu.
2. Note below that default information has been added in the dialog box. This is the
information that will show you what will be applied on templates. Replace the defaults
with project information. The User-defined attributes … dialog box, which can be
customized, stores further project related information.

The value fields on the main dialog box may need to be reserved for use by the detailer
or fabricator if the model is being shared. In this case, the User-defined attributes
relating to the engineering team on the Project Team tab should be used.

3. Click OK.

Preferences
Before starting to model check that preferences are set up correctly. For additional information
see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > System Guide > Files and folders > Files
storing options and advanced options > Settings in the Options dialog box.

Verify that your preferences are set up correctly before you start modeling. If you
change your settings in Options, Tekla Structures only applies the new settings to items
you create subsequently. Items you created prior to changing the preferences are not
affected.

1. Select Tools > Options > Options… from the menu bar.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-8 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 2. Select Load modeling on the left side and check that the Current code on the right side is
set as desired.

3. Click OK.

Part Properties
The Engineering role and template provide a set of example Engineering attributes to model
various elements for this tutorial. These settings have been pre-defined such that the modeled
parts will correspond with the pre-defined construction drawing settings. See the section on
Modeling Discipline in the Coordination Practices chapter for more information.
The supplied settings provide a consistent set of attributes across the various disciplines using
Tekla Structures. Changes should be coordinated through your Tekla Structures administrator.

3.3 Create the Grid

We will now create a grid for the model according to the work plane (the current local
coordinate system, which is aligned to the global coordinate system of the model). We will
then rotate the grid to the desired position, align the work plane to this new position, and reset
the work area. Finally, we will compare our grid with a reference grid provided by another
trade and create views based on our new grid system.
For more information on grids and dialog box buttons see Tekla User Assistance: Home >
Instructions > Basics of Tekla Structures > Interface overview > Common buttons.

You can also create a skewed grid by setting the work plane to the desired skewed
position and creating the grid from that position – offset not required.

Create the Grid

1. Delete the default grid.
2. Select Modeling > Create Grid… from the menu.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-9
 3. Edit the grid information, in the Grid dialog box, according to the figure below
(Coordinates and Labels).

4. Click Create.
5. Enter ENG_Grid in the Save as field.
6. Click the Save as button to save the grid values.

7. Click Close to close the dialog box.

It is a good idea to save settings that you may need again. For instance, if the grid was
accidentally deleted then it would be a simple matter of reloading the settings to recreate
the grid.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-10 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Rotate Grid
Now we can rotate our grid as desired.
1. Select the grid.
2. Right-click and select Move Special > Rotate…
3. Pick the intersection of grid lines C and 1 (C|1).
The Move – Rotate dialog box will reflect the new origin point that was selected.
4. Enter 15 for the degrees of rotation around that origin point.

5. Click Move.
6. Click Expand.

If we were to start modeling parts now, especially footings and columns, they would come in
square to the global coordinate system. The work plane must be modified to follow the skew
of the building before any parts are modeled.

The red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is the current local
coordinate system of the model. Most of the commands that are coordinate system
dependent use the work plane coordinates.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-11
 Set Work Plane to a New Position
Now we need to set our work plane to the new skew so that our modeled parts will have the
correct orientation.
1. Select View > Set Work Plane > Using Two Points.
2. Pick the intersection C|1 to set the new origin.
3. Pick a point along grid line C to indicate the new positive X direction.

If the work plane is not “set” correctly relative to the global coordinate symbol, reset the
work plane to the 3d view using the View > Set Work plane > Parallel to View Plane
tool and try again.

The tools will stay active until you interrupt them. To stop them, right-click and select
Interrupt from the pop-up menu, or press the Esc key.

To restart the last tool used, press Enter.

Fit Work Area

Since the current work area is larger than needed we will reduce it to fit our soon to be
modeled parts.
1. Click anywhere on the view’s background to select it (a red bounding box outlines it).
2. Right-click and select Fit Work Area to Entire Model.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-12 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Verifying Grids against Reference Files
Users can verify their structural grid layouts against those provided by other disciplines’ grids
Below is an example of how a structural engineer can reference an architect's 2D DWG grid
plan.
1. Double-click the Insert reference model icon.

2. Browse to the desired file path where the reference drawing is located.
(C:\TeklaStructuresModels\Engineering\CAD).
3. Select the reference drawing (S101_DWG.dwg).

This path and reference object file are provided by the Engineering Pre-Training package
and the provided path is correct if you used the root folder of your C drive as the
extraction location. If your path is too long or you want to set the path relative to the
model, you can use the “..\” switch to indicate that it is a folder back and in the CAD
folder.

4. Define a Scale which corresponds with the scale used in creating the drawing. This
example uses 96 which correlates to the 1'-0" = 1/8" scale of the plan.
5. Select OK within the Reference Model Properties dialog box.
The user is prompted, in the lower left corner, to select a point of origin for the reference
model.
6. Select grid intersection C|1. The reference drawing will appear in the view.
7. Do not expand the view when prompted.
8. Adjust the location of the reference file as needed to align the first grid intersection.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-13
 The user can move the reference object around by selecting it and moving it like any
other type of object. The user can also use the measure tools with the reference drawing
lines or objects by snapping to them. To snap to the points in the reference object, make
sure the Snap to geometry lines / points snap tool is selected.

9. Once the grid systems are verified, the user can turn off the reference drawing visibility by
selecting File > Reference Model List … and turning the S101_DWG reference object
Visibility to Hidden in the Reference Models dialog box.

10. De-activate the Snap to geometry lines / points command.

To remove a reference object from the model, highlight the reference to be removed in
the Reference Models dialog box (accessed from the File menu) and select Delete from
the Edit menu. Alternatively, you can select the reference object in an open view and
right-click > Delete.

Create Plane Views along Gridlines

We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines.
1. Select the grid.
2. Right-click and select Create View > Along Grid Lines… from the context menu.
3. Click Create in the Creation of Views Along Grid Lines dialog box.

4. The named Views dialog box opens with the newly available views listed.

The Show… button after each view plane option allows you to open the View
Properties dialog box and set the view properties as desired for each plane type before
generating the grid line based views.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-14 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Create View on Skewed Grid
If you switch the View Angle of the 3d view to Plane, either by changing the properties or
using the Ctrl+P toggle, the grid system is angled in the view window. This is because the view
was created with the work plane aligned to the global coordinate system.

Open any of the plan views and you should see that the grid system is aligned to the view
window.

To create a new 3d view that aligns the grid system to the view window:
1. Select View > View Properties …
2. Load the 3d View settings.
3. Change the Name to something appropriate, such as 3d aligned to skew.
4. Click OK.
5. If the work plane is aligned to the grid select View > Create View of Model > On Work
Plane; otherwise, reset the work plane to the grid first.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-15
3.4 Create Foundation System
Generally, Structural Modelers will build the model from the foundation up. We recommend,
however, that you don’t add too much detail into the foundation system if the Structural
Engineer is pressed for time in completing the structural frame analysis model. The Structural
Modelers can add more detail to the foundation plan after the initial foundation layout is
created and the super-structure is generated for the Structural Engineer. Then, as the
Structural Engineer exports the super-structure to the analysis engine of choice, the Structural
Modelers can continue modeling foundation details or even move on to generating plan
drawings.
An example of this workflow is that the pad footings and/or drilled piers are modeled,
followed by the steel frame. After the analysis model is exported from Tekla Structures, the
Structural Modeler continues adding in strip footings and wall elements.
For simplicity, we will model the entire foundation system comprised of pad footings and strip
footings.

If you have re-opened your model, the work plane will have reset to the global
coordinate system. You can use the Set Work Plane … Using Two Points
(from View menu), Using Three Points (icon or View menu), or Parallel to
View Plane (icon or View menu). To use the Parallel to View Plane you need
to select one of the grid plane views, such as the PLAN AT EL. 0” when
prompted.
Any view that is not aligned with your selected view window will be shown
skewed when the Ctrl+P View Angle toggle is used.

The cross-hair cursor will always be aligned to the global coordinate system.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-16 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Model Pad Footings
At Grid Lines 1 & 7
1. Shift+click on the Create pad footing icon to open the Pad Footing Properties dialog
box.

2. Load the saved pad_F10 settings. Note the pad footing size is 120”*120” (10' x 10') and
the Position defines a 2'-6" thick footing with TFE = 0'-0".

3. In the User-defined attributes, you can define a numbering scheme for drawing schedules
by entering the desired Label/Mark in the Design Group Mark value field (under the
Design Properties tab). If needed, an alternate part name can be entered in the Design
Name value field.

4. Click OK in the Pad footing (1) (User-defined attributes) dialog box.

5. Click Apply in the Pad Footing Properties dialog box.
6. Place pad footings at grid intersections C|1 and D|1.
7. Load the saved pad_F12 settings.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-17
 8. Click Apply.
9. Place pad footings at grid intersections E|1 and F|1.
10. End the command by right-clicking and selecting Interrupt from the pop-up menu or
pressing the Esc key.
11. Select the four pad footings by dragging a selection fence around them (Hold down the left
button on mouse). For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions
> Basics of Tekla Structures > Selecting objects > Selecting multiple objects.

12. Right-click on the screen and select Copy. Click to select grid intersection F|1. Then click
to select grid intersection F|7. The footings should now look like those shown below.

At Grid Lines 2, 4, & 6

1. Load the pad_F8 pad footing settings and select Apply.
2. Click the Create pad footing icon once to activate the tool.
3. Model pad footings at grid intersections C|2 and F|2.
4. Stop the tool.
5. Select these two new pad footings by using either a selection box or the Ctrl key.
6. Right-click, select Copy and pick D|2 as the original position and then D|4 and D|6.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-18 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 At Grid Lines 3 & 5
1. Load the pad_F10 pad footing setting and select OK.
2. Restart the tool and add pad footings with these settings at grid intersections C|3, D|3,
E|3, and F|3.

3. Stop the tool and Copy the pad footings along grid line 3 to grid line 5. Alternately, you
can pick the grid intersections along grid line 5 to model these pad footings.

Model Strip Footings

We will now create strip footings. Strip footings are typically modeled below walls and pre-
cast panels. They can also be defined as grade beams which act as collector beams between
adjacent pad footings.

Check that your work plane is aligned to your grid before proceeding.

1. Open or go to the 3d view. Note this view was created with the grid at 0" elevation.
Therefore, modeling objects in this view will place the handle points at that elevation.
Alternately, you can use the PLAN AT EL. 0” view for modeling the strip footings.
2. Open the Strip Footing Properties dialog box by double-clicking on the Create strip
footing icon.

3. Load the StripFooting attribute and change the Shape to 24"*24".

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-19
 4. Select OK.
5. Select the grid intersection C|1 as the start point of the first strip footing.
6. Select the grid intersection D|1 as the next, or end, point of the strip footing – the status
bar should be prompting you to Pick polygon position.
7. Click the middle-mouse button to finish selecting points for the strip footing.

You can also finish the endpoint selection by clicking the left mouse button twice
(double-click).

8. Add a strip footing between grid intersections D|1 and E|1 following the process presented
in steps 5 -7 above.
9. Add a strip footing between grid intersections E|1 and F|1 following the process presented
in steps 5 -7 above.

10. Add three strip footings along grid 7, as outlined in the steps above.

Fitting the Strip Footings to the Pad Footings

Note that the strip footing mass overlaps the pad footing mass and should be removed for
correct quantities. To remove the overlapping masses, we will use a component to “fit” the
parts.
1. To fit the strip footing to the pad footing, find and select the Cip Fitting from the
Component Catalog (binocular icon or Ctrl-F shortcut).

2. At the Pick main part status bar prompt, select the pad footing at grid intersection F|1.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-20 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 3. At the Pick secondary part (at the maximum 1) status bar prompt, select the strip
footing between grid intersections E|1 and F|1. A fitting object will be created between
the pad footing and the strip footing.
4. Select the pad footing at grid intersection E|1 and the strip footing between grid
intersections E|1 and F|1. A fitting is placed on the other end of this strip footing.

5. Repeat the above steps with the remaining pad and strip footings along grid lines 1 & 7.

Several strip footings can be modeled with one command by single clicking on the
intermediate points of a strip footing line. However, this method is not recommended
because you can’t use the fitting tool for continuous strip footings.

Model Concrete Columns

Now we will create the concrete columns that support the first level.

Check that your work plane is aligned to your grid before proceeding.

Model Rectangular Columns on Grid Line 1

1. Double-click on the Create concrete column icon.
2. Load the pre-saved Cip_Column properties.
3. On the Position tab set the Bottom at 0'-0" and the Top at 23'-6".

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-21
 4. Enter the information in the Attributes tab for a 36”*24” (3’-0*2’-0) column.

5. Click Apply.
6. Pick the grid intersections C|1 and F|1.

Model Square Columns on Grid Line 1

While the Create column tool is still active:
1. Complete the dialog box for 24”X24” (2’-0*2’-0) columns.

2. Click OK.
3. Create these columns at grid intersections D|1 and E|1.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-22 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Copy the Rectangular Columns
1. Select the columns at grid intersections C|1 and F|1.
2. Right-click and select Copy Special > Linear… on the pop-up context menu.
3. Pick… two points to show the translation vector (19’-8” in x direction).
4. Type in the number of copies (6).
5. Click Copy, and end the command.

Copy the Square Columns

1. Select the columns at grid intersections D|1 and E|1.
2. Right-click and select Copy Special > Linear… on the pop-up context menu. If the dialog
is still open you can click Pick... to restart the tool.
3. Pick a point on grid line 1 then on grid line 3 to show the translation vector (39’-4” in x
direction).
4. Type in the number of copies (3).
5. Click Copy, and end the command.

Model Concrete Beams

We will now create the concrete beams along gridlines 1 and 3 at level 23’-6” and then create
rotated copies of them for the other half of the structure.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-23
 Check that your work plane is aligned to your grid before proceeding.

Model Ledger Beams on Grid Lines 1 & 3

1. Shift- click, or double-click, on the Create concrete beam icon.

2. Click the button next to the Shape field to open the Select Profile dialog box in order to
enter the values required.

3. Select the LBEAM parametric profile from the Others category.

4. Enter the values so that a=16", b=24", c=6", and d=8" for the beams on gridline 1.
5. Click Apply.

The LBEAM and ITBEAM profiles used in this section are custom profiles in the model
template. If they are not available in your profile catalog you will need to import them.
Contact your instructor for further information and assistance.

6. Pick the top of the column at C|1. Pick the top point of the column at D|1.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-24 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 7. Create the other two beams on gridline 1 in the same manner.
8. Open the Select Profile dialog box once again.
9. Select the ITBEAM profile.

10. Enter the information for the beams on gridline 3 to reflect values so that a=24", b=5",
c=5", d=8”, f=8", and g=16".
11. Set the At depth position to Middle.
12. Click Apply.
13. Create the gridline 3 beams.
The model should now look as shown below.

An easy way to view the profiles of the model is to change the view display to wire-frame
by pressing Ctrl+2. To return to solid rendering press Ctrl+4.

Copy the Ledger Beams

1. Select the beams just created on gridlines 1 and 3; you can select them individually or with
a selection box in conjunction with the Cip_Beam selection filter.

2. Use the Copy Special > Rotate… command to easily place the beams on the other end of
the structure by selecting the midpoint of gridline 4 as the center of rotation. The origin
fields will auto-populate with coordinates for the point based on the work plane location.
3. Number of copies should be 1 and the Angle of rotation should be set to 180.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-25
 4. Click Copy.
5. If you used a selection filter be sure to set it back to standard.
The model now looks as shown below.

Mirroring objects is strongly discouraged, though it can be used in certain situations

without ill effects.

Model Foundation Walls

Concrete walls or panels can be defined using the Create concrete panel icon or the
Create concrete slab icon. This example shows how to model walls using the Create
concrete panel icon. See Model Discipline chapter for when to best use these different
modeling techniques for concrete.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-26 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Check that your work plane is aligned to your grid before proceeding.

Model Wall along Grid 1

1. Open two Views: 3d and PLAN AT EL. 23'-6". Go to Windows > Tile Vertically to show
both views on your screen.
2. Open the Concrete Panel Properties dialog box by shift-clicking, or double-clicking, on
the Create concrete panel icon.

3. Define a wall profile of 23'6*12 (do not enter a dash or inch marks), which is from
elevation 23'-6" to the top of strip footing at an elevation of 0".
4. Switch to the Position tab. Define in the In plane settings as Left and 1'-0" for the offset
and the In depth settings as Behind and 0".

5. Select Apply.
6. Activate the Snap to geometry lines / points selector icon.

7. With the Create concrete panel command active, pick, in the plan view, the first point
to start the wall. Pick the bottom edge of the concrete column along gridline 1, just below
gridline E (the midpoint snap should highlight).

8. Pick the second point along gridline 1, just above gridline F at the top edge of the concrete
column (the midpoint snap should highlight).

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-27
 9. Middle-mouse-click to finish picking points for the tool.
10. Select Do not expand and the wall should be placed such that the ends of wall are flush
with the concrete columns at F|1 and E|1.

Model Wall Along Grid 7

1. Adjust the two views, 3D and PLAN AT EL. 23'-6", so that the area between the columns
at E|7 and F|7 is visible.
2. Reactivate the Concrete Panel tool by single-clicking on the Create concrete panel
icon.
Here we will practice following a precast detailing workflow and model
the wall to follow a clockwise erection plan.
3. With the Create concrete panel icon selected, pick, in the plan view,
the first point to start the wall. Pick at the top edge of the concrete
column along gridline 7, just above gridline F (the midpoint snap
should highlight).
4. Pick the second point along gridline 7, just below gridline E at the
bottom edge of the concrete column (the midpoint snap should
highlight).
5. Middle-mouse-click to finish the command.
6. The wall should be placed such that its ends are flush with the concrete
columns at F|7 and E|7.
7. Turn off the Snap to geometry lines / points select switch.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-28 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Since the wall’s start and end handles are located on the grid, the plane of the wall's
analysis nodes will also be created on grid line. This is a typical assumption by engineers
when modeling shear walls. If the engineer wants the plane of the wall analysis nodes
to be off grid, he or she can define them using the analysis node offsets or model them
off grid. See Analysis & Design chapter for more information.

Modify Strip Footings

Since the current strip footings do not extend under the wall panels, we will change their size.
1. Select the strip footing between E|1 and F|1.
2. Right-click and select Properties…
3. Click the Select/Deselect toggle button to uncheck all of the boxes.
4. Change the Shape value to 24”*48” and click Modify.

5. Select the box next to the Shape field.

6. Select the strip footing between E|7 and F|7 and click Modify.

Model the Main Level Slabs

This model uses hollow core slabs that are supported by the ledger beams modeled earlier.

Check that your work plane is aligned to your grid before proceeding.

1. Open the PLAN AT ELEV 23'-6” view.

2. Shift+click on the Create concrete beam icon.

3. Load the Precast_HC_Plank settings.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-29
 4. Verify that the Beam Properties are as shown.
5. In the PLAN AT EL. 23'-6” view select
the grid intersections of C|1 and C|3 to
place the hollow core unit. End the
command.
6. Select the hollow core unit.
7. Right-click and select Copy Special >
Linear… from the pop-up context
menu.
8. Enter a dY value of 24" and 38 copies. Then click Copy. You should now have one bay
filled.

9. Rotate the model (Ctrl + middle-mouse click & drag) as necessary to facilitate a crossing
selection (right to left) of the hollow core units.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-30 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 10. Click the Pick … button in the Copy – Linear dialog box to re-activate the command.
11. Select the grid intersections of C|1 and C|3 to populate the dX value field.

12. Enter 2 in the Number of copies value field and click Copy.
The remaining two bays should now be filled.

3.5 Create Steel Framing System

First, we will create two columns on gridline 1 and then a sloping beam, or rafter, between
them. After that, we will create the construction points needed to add the horizontal bracing
and joists. We will then copy the completed portal frame and points across the model.
Then to emulate a change in the contract, we will remove the concrete columns on gridlines 2,
4 and 6, and modify the upper steel columns so that they become full-length steel columns.
Utilizing a sloping work plane and view planes, we will model the horizontal bracing and
joists. Then, horizontal beams along gridlines C and F will be added for stability. Finally, a
mezzanine level will be created along with some vertical bracing on gridlines C and F.

If you reopen your model the work plane will reset to the global coordinate
system. You can use the Set Work Plane > Using Two Points (from the View
menu), Using Three Points (icon or View menu), or Parallel to View Plane
(icon or View menu). To use Parallel to View Plane you need to select one of
the grid plane views, such as the PLAN AT EL. 0” when prompted.

Model Steel Columns at Grid Line 1

We will first create two W27X94 columns at C|1 and F|1.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-31
 1. Shift+click on the Create column icon.
2. Load the Column properties.

3. In the User-defined attributes… under the Design Properties tab, modify the Design
Group Mark value to C1 and click OK.

4. Complete the Column Properties for the W27X94 column at grid intersection C|1. The
columns on grid line C should have a bottom elevation of 23'-6", a top elevation of 66’-3",
and a 90° rotation.

5. Click Apply.
6. Pick grid intersection C|1 to create the column.
7. Complete the Column Properties for the column at grid F|1. The columns on grid line F
should have a bottom elevation of 23'-6" and a top elevation of 59’-8". The Design Group
Mark needs to be set to C2.

8. Click OK.
9. Pick the grid intersection F|1 to create the second column.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-32 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Model a Steel Rafter at Grid Line 1
Now we will create a rafter between the two columns that we just created.
1. Open the ELEVATION ON GRID 1 view.
2. Double-click on the Create beam icon.

3. Load the Rafter properties.

4. Enter W30X99 for the rafter Profile and click OK.
5. In the ELEVATION ON GRID 1 view pick C|66’-3” and then F|59’-8”.

Establish Work Points for Roof Elements

We will now create work points for the braces and joists. Along the top of the beam we will
first create the work points for the first and the last brace. Then we will evenly divide the space
between these points. Next, we will copy the points and steel frame to the other grid lines and
finally we will create work points for the joists at grid line 3.

Create First and Last Brace Work Points

1. Double-click on the Add point along extension of two picked points icon.

2. Type -2-6.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-33
 3. Select OK (remember to include the 'negative' sign).

The Add point along extension of two picked points tool adds a point along a line,
specified by clicking two points in the model. The points that are picked in the model
define the positive vector, while the positive or negative distance value set in the dialog
box defines the offset from the last point clicked. A positive value means the extension
point will be farther away from the first point clicked, while a negative value means it
will be closer to the first point clicked.

4. Pick one of the grid intersections (C|66'-3” or F|59’-8”), and then the other.
5. Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order to place an offset point at the other end.

Create Intermediate Bracing Work Points

Using the Add points on line command, divide the space between the work points that you
just created into ten equal spaces (9 points).
6. Double-click on the Add points on line icon.

7. Enter 9 as the number of dividing points and select OK.

8. Pick one of the work points that you just created, and then the other.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-34 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Copy the Steel Frame and Points
We will now copy the columns, the rafter, and the points to gridlines 2 through 7.
1. Select the columns, the rafter, and the work points. You can use a crossing selection (right
to left) and the grid will be selected but not copied.

2. Right-click and select Copy Special > Linear….

3. In the 3d view, pick two points to show the translation vector (19’-8” in x direction).
4. Type the number of copies (6).
5. Select Copy.

6. You may need to expand the visibility envelope of the 3d view at this point, if your rafters
are not visible. To do this, double-click in open space in the 3d view then change the
dialog box as shown below and select Modify.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-35
 Delete Excess Points
The work points copied to grid lines 3, 4, and 5 are not needed and will be in the way later, so
we will delete them now.
1. In the 3d view, rotate the model (Ctrl + middle-mouse click & drag) as necessary for an
easier selection of the work points.
2. Change your selection options to Select points only (you may need to select the switch
twice to toggle the others off).

3. Select multiple points along the beams on grid lines 3, 4, and 5 by using a containing
selection box, which is drawn left to right.
4. Delete the selected points by pressing the Delete key or selecting Delete from the pop-up
context menu accessed by right-clicking.
5. Repeat as necessary.
6. Return your selection switches to the default by clicking on the Select all switch.

We can now use the ELEVATION ON GRID 3 view to create the work points for the joists.

Create First & Last Joist Work Points

1. Double-click on the Add point along extension of two picked points icon.
2. Type -2-0” and click OK.

3. In the ELEVATION ON GRID 3 view, pick grid intersections C|66’-3” and F|59’-8”.
4. Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order to place an offset point at the other end.

Create Intermediate Joist Work Points

5. Using the Add points on line command, divide the space between the work points that
you just created into twelve equal spaces (11 points).

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-36 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Model Roof Bracing & Joists
The next step is modeling the horizontal bracing and roof joists of the sloped roof. To place the
parts in the correct plane we will first change the work plane (which currently is the local
coordinate system of the model) to the roof slope. Then we will model the bracing at each end
of the roof, followed by the joists.
For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Modeling Guide >
Setting up the workspace > Work plane.

Set Work Plane to the Roof Slope

To set the work plane to the roof slope:
1. Pick the Set work plane using three points icon.

2. Pick the top of the C|1 column as the origin.

3. Pick the top of another grid C column to define the positive x-direction.
4. Pick the top of the F|1 column to define the positive y-direction. The work plane is now
positioned to the top plane of the rafters.

5. End the command.

Model Horizontal Bracing

Remember to model in a globally positive direction with the x-direction taking precedence.
1. Double-click on the Create beam icon.

2. Load the Horizontal_brace properties.

3. Set the Profile to WT6X15.
4. Set the Position > At depth to Behind with a value of 14"7/8 (half of the rafter’s depth).
5. Select OK.
6. In the 3d view, create the braces shown in the drawing by snapping to the points. You may
wish to disable all snaps except for the Snap to points and grid intersections and Snap
to reference lines / points.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-37
 7. Check the position of the braces in the 3d and ELEVATION ON GRID 1 views.
8. Add the braces to the other end of the building (between gridlines 6 and 7).
We will now create the joists by using a true plan view to ensure that the handles will be in the
work plane and the sloping work plane view to establish the rotation of the joists off of
vertical. We will also use a “detailing” joist style, which represents them with a single part
object; this style of joist in Tekla Structures is more fabrication friendly than a composite joist
(made of multiple pieces) and will make for an easier exchange of the joist design data.

Create True Plan View

1. Select View > Create View of Model > On Work Plane to create a temporary view
(indicated by parenthesis around the view name) parallel to the roof plane.
2. Double-click in the view’s background to open the View Properties dialog box.
3. Select and Load the Plan View settings from the options list.
4. Provide an appropriate Name, such as TRUE ROOF PLAN.
5. Click Modify (providing a name that is not contained in parenthesis converts the view
from temporary).

Model Detailing Joists

1. Double-click on the Create beam icon.
2. Load the Joist properties.
3. Select a 12K profile for the joists.
4. Change the Position / At depth to: Behind with a -2"1/2 offset and click OK.

5. Pick the joist work point near grid intersection C|3 at the status bar prompt, Pick first
position.

6. At the status bar prompt, Pick second position, pick the point perpendicular to the
rafter along grid line 4.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-38 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 7. Right-click > Interrupt.
8. Check the ELEVATION ON GRID 3 to ensure that the roof joist is oriented and positioned
correctly.

Copy the Joists

1. In the 3d View, select the joist.
2. Right-click > Copy Special > Linear.
3. Pick two consecutive work points to define the distance in the Copy – Linear dialog box.

4. Enter the Number of copies (12) and click Copy.

5. Right-click > Interrupt.
6. Select all of the joists.
7. In the Copy – Linear dialog box, click Pick...
8. Select the grid intersections C|3 and C|2.
9. Change the Number of copies to 2 and click Copy.
10. In the Copy – Linear dialog box, click Pick...
11. Select the grid intersections C|4 and C|5.
12. Change the Number of copies to 3 and click Copy.
13. Close the Copy –Linear dialog box.
14. Close the elevation views.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-39
 Reset the Work Plane
1. Select View > Set Work Plane > Parallel to View Plane.
2. At the Pick View prompt, click in either the 3d aligned to skew or PLAN AT EL. 0”
view. Don’t forget to Save the model.

You can turn off the visibility of points through the View Properties dialog box for
the views you are using (or you may delete the points).

Modify Columns
We will now remove the concrete columns on gridlines 2, 4 and 6 and modify the steel
columns above them to extend down to the footings.
1. Select the six concrete columns (at C|2, C|4, C|6, F|2, F|4, and F|6) using the Ctrl key for
multiple selection.
2. Press the Delete key or right-click and select Delete from the menu.
3. Select the six steel columns (at C|2, C|4, C|6, F|2, F|4, and F|6) using the Ctrl key for
multiple selection.
4. Rotate the model (Ctrl + middle-mouse click & drag) as necessary to facilitate an area
selection of the yellow column handles.
5. Hold down the Alt key while dragging a containing box (left to right) around the yellow
handles of the columns; the status bar should indicate 0 + 6 object(s) selected.

6. Right-click > Move.

7. Pick one of the highlighted handles (endpoint snap).

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-40 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 8. Pick the corresponding grid intersection below the handle.

Model Eave Bracing

1. Open the Beam Properties dialog box and Load the pre-saved Horizontal_hss_Brace
settings.
2. Use the Create beam, Move, and Copy tools to add in HSS8X4X1/4 beams along
gridlines C and F, 4’-0” below the tops of the columns.

3.6 Create Mezzanine Framing

Now we will add columns, beams, and bracing for the mezzanine level.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-41
 If you reopen your model the work plane will reset to the global coordinate
system. You can use the Set Work Plane … Using Two Points (from the View
menu), Using Three Points (icon or View menu), or Parallel to View Plane
(icon or View menu). To use the Parallel to View Plane tool you need to select
one of the grid plane views, such as the PLAN AT EL. 0”, when prompted.

Model Interior Columns

1. Open the PLAN AT EL. 42'-0" view.
2. Double-click on the Create column icon.
3. Load the pre-saved Column properties.
4. Enter the information as indicated (W14X43, 42'-0", 23'-6") and select OK.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-42 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 5. Pick the grid intersections D|3, D|5, D|7, E|3, E|5 and E|7 to place the six intermediate
columns. Select Do not expand when prompted.

6. Right-click > Interrupt.

Model Mezzanine Beams

1. Double-click on the Create beam icon.
2. Load the Beam properties.
3. Select the W27X94 profile and select Apply. Leave the Beam Properties dialog box
open.
4. Place two beams along gridline D between the columns at D|3, D|5 & D|7.
5. Place two beams along gridline E between the columns at E|3, E|5 & E|7.

6. In the Beam Properties dialog box select the W16X36 profile and select Apply. Leave
the beam dialog box open.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-43
 7. Continue to place beams as indicated in figure below (remember the positive global
method of placement for model consistency).

Now we will place a skewed beam.

1. Make sure only the Snap to reference lines / points icon of the two main snap switches
on the right is selected.
2. Make sure the Snap to points and grid intersections and Snap to end points icons are
selected.

Temporary Snap Reference Method:

Hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the reference point to snap from, define the
offset direction desired by engaging a snap point in that direction, then enter the desired
offset dimension.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-44 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
3. Using the temporary snap reference, place the skewed beam with the left end offset 3'-0
from the C|5 grid intersection, as indicated in the figure below, and the right end at grid
intersection D|7.

4. In the beam dialog box, select the W14X43 profile and select Apply. Leave the Beam
Properties dialog box open.

5. Place the four beams (C|4-C|5, F|5-F|6 offset, F|4-F|5, F|6-F|7) as indicated in the image
below (remember, the positive global method of placement for model consistency).

6. Stop the Create beam tool.

Snap Overrides

Right-click while in a placement command and the pop-up menu presents a list of
temporary snap overrides.

Alternately, you can use the on-screen dimensions and the nearest points snap tool to
model these beams.

7. Use the Add points on line command to divide the skewed beam into four sections to
easily place infill beams.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-45
 8. Activate Snap to mid points.

9. In the beam dialog box, select the W14X34 profile. Select OK.
10. Place the beams as indicated in following image (remember the positive global method of
placement for model consistency).

11. The small infill beams are offset 5'-0 (use the temporary snap reference method).

Next, we will add three sets of bracing.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-46 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Model Vertical Bracing
1. Click the Open component catalog icon to open the Component Catalog.

2. Select the Custom category from the stored search list.

3. Find the Chevron Bottom component. Double-click it to open the properties dialog box.

4. Select the HSS8X8X1/4 profile, click Apply in the Select Profile dialog box, and then
Apply in the Chevron Bottom components dialog box.

5. The status bar should prompt Pick main part or area; select the mezzanine beam D|3-
E|3 (@ elevation 42'-0").
6. The status bar should prompt Pick first position; select base of the column at D|3. Note
if you rotate the PLAN AT EL. 42’-0” view it is easier to pick the base of the column.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-47
 7. The status bar should prompt Pick second position; select base of the column at E|3.
8. Repeat these steps for the bracing at the opposite end (D|7-E|7).
9. Repeat these steps for the final bracing at E|7-F|7 using the HSS7X7X1/4 profile.

10. If you rotated your plan view, reset it to planar using the Ctrl+P toggle.
11. Save the model.

3.7 Model Quality Review

This section shows the modeler’s ability to verify his/her technique and discipline at various
stages of the project. As discussed in the Modeling Discipline section of the Coordination
Practices chapter, there is a certain protocol typically used to ease the drawing and analysis
model creation processes. This protocol will also simplify the transfer of the model
downstream to subcontractors.
Tekla Structures has several tools that allow the user to check information about the model.
Below, several tools are shown with examples.

Using Selection Filters

Selection filters allow the user to only select objects in the model with certain characteristics,
as identified by the user. Selection filters can be used to isolate certain structural systems, one
group at a time. These can be used to modify the properties of object groups, but the user can
also use selection filters to verify that objects have been assigned names or other values,
according to the agreed upon naming convention or company standards. Presented below is an
example:
1. Go to the selection filter option list and select Steel_BraceHSS.
2. Activate the Select objects in components selection switch and select the model.

Only the bracing members are selected.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-48 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
3. Note that if the Object group - Selection Filter dialog box is opened (see image below),
the user can see what rules have been set up to determine the types of objects selected.

In this case, any object that has a name ending in BRACE and a profile that begins with HSS,
TS, TUBE, or PIPE is included in the selection group.
With the bracing members selected as defined above, the user can now visually inspect the
model for the desired criteria or run a report to list the properties of the objects selected.
1. Select Drawings & Reports > Create Report…
2. Select the 350 Material list report.
3. Click Create from selected.
4. A dialog box opens with a list of material takeoff information. Note that we can see that
two braces are HSS7x7, four are HSS8x8, and 12 are HSS8X4. In reviewing the various
sizes used, the engineer may opt to consolidate the number of sizes.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-49
 When finished using a selection filter, remember to set it back to standard. Otherwise,
you cannot select other objects in the model.

Using Interactive Reports

Reports can be used to verify specific information about the model. Below is an example of
how the model can be selected and its properties viewed to quickly assess model data.
1. Set the selection filter to standard.
2. Select the model. All the objects should highlight (note that the number of selected objects
will show up in the lower right corner).
3. In the menu bar, select Drawings & Reports > Create Report…
4. Select the 175 Design Summary report.
5. Click Create from selected.
With this report, the part GUID is listed in the rightmost column. When reports are set up to
include the part GUID, the user can highlight the report row and the corresponding part
highlights in the model (pressing the Z key while selecting the list item will zoom in to the
object. Pressing the F key while selecting the list item will zoom in and fit the work area to the
object). As we see in the image below, the mezzanine beam between D|3-E|3 is highlighted
in the report and in the model. This specific report shows key information like name (Detailing
& Design Group) which can be used for setting up drawing filters, material grade, elevation,
and length. Also, the orientation column identifies which members have different start and end
Z values. The user can use this as a check to determine if sloped beams were modeled
correctly (or if they should be horizontal). Since column objects have different z values they
will show up in the list as sloped.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-50 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 This report is just one example of the type of data which can be brought into reports to check
the model integrity before moving on to more detailed modeling. We recommend that you
use these reports periodically to verify the model. In fact, the Structural Engineer could
review the Structural Modeler's work using such tools.

Using Object Representation

Object Representation is probably the most powerful visualization tool in Tekla Structures.
Below is an example of how a rule-based filtering system can be used to verify several values
within the foundation system. This exercise can be done prior to creating foundation drawings
so that the designer knows that the foundation elements have been modeled with the correct
data (including object naming convention and design group marks).
1. We will first isolate the foundation elements in the model visually. Double-click on the
background of the 3d view. Set the Visible object group to Cip_Foundation.

2. Click Modify. You should only see the foundation elements (footings, walls, piers, etc). A
forced redraw of the view may be necessary. Note that the user can add object types to the
Cip_Foundation setting. For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home >
Instructions > Modeling Guide > Grouping parts > Creating an object group .

3. Select View > Representation > Object Representation... from the menu bar.
4. Load the Foundation Check setting.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-51
 This visualization set includes rules for all the foundation object types known by the engineer
or designer. For example, the catalog of pad footing types used by the engineering office
(named F1 to F12) is included in the visualization set. Also, walls and strip footings are
included. Each object type is checked to make sure specific information about it matches the
company standard. If that information deviates from the standard, it will display as ghosted
blue in the model.

5. Click Modify to use the settings in the current view.

Several of the pad footings fall into the All object group which and are displayed as blue with
90% transparency. This is because the Design Group Mark is a unique attribute whose value
does not get copied when the object is copied.

If you manually modeled in the footings along column line 5 in lieu of copying them
from column line 3 (ref. page 3-19), the footings along column line 5 should be visible
and gray.

6. Select the footing at C|2, right-click > User-Defined Attributes…

7. Toggle off the check boxes, then on the Design Properties tab turn on the check box for
the Design Group Mark.
8. Select the four F8 pad footings on grid lines 4 and 6 and click Modify.
The pad footings now fit the “rule set” for their size, name, and mark and are no longer
displayed as ghosted.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3-52 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
9. Repeat this process to update the Design Group Mark for the remaining pad footings.
10. After checking your model with Object representation, Load the standard setting back
within the dialog box and click Modify. This setting will filter all the objects based on
Class, as originally done.

11. Change the View Properties setting, Visible Object Group, to standard. Select Modify.
Now the entire model is shown once again.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-53
 Engineering: Basic Modeling 2
3-54 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Connections
Engineering

Tekla Structures 19.1

2013 Engineering Basic Training
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Contents

4 Connections ...................................................................................... 3
In this lesson............................................................................................................ 3
4.1 About System Components .................................................................................... 4
4.2 Add Connections to Engineering Model ................................................................ 4
Base Plates ............................................................................................................. 4
Beam-to-Beam Connections .................................................................................. 9
Beam-to-Column Connections ............................................................................. 10
Bracing Connections ............................................................................................. 13
Joist to Beam ......................................................................................................... 15
Check a Connection .............................................................................................. 18
Check Clashing Of Steel Structures .................................................................... 21

Engineering: Connections
4-i
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
4 Connections

In this lesson
Typically, once a project enters the CD phase (construction document phase), the addition of
structural connections to the Tekla Structures model will occur. There are various reasons for
adding structural connections to the model including:
Visualizing constructability issues and load paths by the engineering team
Showing concept connections on engineering drawings
Passing pre-detailed connections to the steel/concrete detailers for their use
Passing the model to the contractor for purposes of clash detection, material
quantities, and/or visualization
The efficiency gained from modeling connections is in the management of the application of
the connections and not in the tools themselves. Knowing when to add the connections to the
project and to what degree to add structural connections is very important to define up front in
the project. See the lesson on Coordination Practices for a more in-depth discussion of this topic.
This lesson introduces the basics of creating structural connections, called system components,
in Tekla Structures.
You will learn how to:
Create connections
Work with connection properties
Save the properties for later use

Note that images in this lesson may have parts hidden to provide clarity in the image.
Also different rendering states may be presented without instruction to change; this is to
provide clarity in the presented images.

Engineering: Connections
4-3
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 4.1 About System Components
The greatest benefits of using system components are:
Saving the component properties to a particular name allows the user to access them
later, or in other projects, as well.
When you modify an object’s profile in the model, all of the connections to the object
are automatically modified at the same time.
If you highlight an object and select options such as edit, copy, or mirror, all
connections to the object are automatically included if possible. The connections
copied or mirrored are the same as the originals. The same applies to plates and bolts.
With AutoDefaults, you can create rules defining when to use different connection
properties for the Autoconnection tool.
The Component catalog holds all available system components. There are two ways to access
this: By using Ctrl+F, or by clicking the "binocular" icon on the Detailing toolbar.
When applying a connection that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties and
create the connection. Then, look to see what needs to be modified. This is usually quicker
than trying to set the values for the connection before seeing what the connection actually
creates.
Home › Instructions › Detailing Guide › Getting started with components › Creating components
Home › Instructions › Detailing Guide › Getting started with components › Basics of components ›
Component concepts
Home › Instructions › Detailing Guide › Getting started with components › Basics of components ›
Selection order
Home › Instructions › Detailing Guide › Getting started with components › Basics of components ›
Up direction

Use the Autoonnection setting called Fittings/PrelimMatl to quickly fit or trim

members without applying detailed connections for conceptual cost estimating purposes
and drawing details. See Help on Autoconnection for more information in using this
feature.

4.2 Add Connections to Engineering Model

We will now apply components to specific areas of the model for preliminary drawing
representation. The component examples provided in this chapter are examples of the more
commonly used system components in Tekla Structures.

Base Plates
Initially, we will apply a base plate with the default settings and then modify it to reflect our
requirements. Then, we will create the rest of the base plates with the refined properties.

Engineering: Connections
4-4 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
How to Establish Base Plate Settings
1. Open the Component Catalog by left-clicking on the Open component catalog icon or
by typing Ctrl+F.
2. To see pictures of the connections, make sure the Thumbnails mode is active.
3. Type "base plate" into the upper value field and click Search (or Enter).

4. In the component window, double-click on the Base plate (1004) icon.

5. Click OK to accept the default values.
6. Pick the column at grid intersection C|2
7. Pick the base of the column using the endpoint snap and the base plate will be created.

8. Use the shortcut Ctrl+2 to make the parts displayed in shaded wire frame.

Engineering: Connections
4-5
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 9. Interrupt the command.
We will change the length of the anchor rods in the base plate by modifying the connection
properties.
10. Double-click on the green connection symbol (or any object in the component with the
Select components selection switch active), and the Base plate dialog box will reopen.

11. Select the Anchor rods tab page in the dialog box.
12. Edit the desired values: Anchor height = 1’-8”, Grout placement is Above the reference
point (picked point), and Position number values are p and 1.

13. Click Modify

Engineering: Connections
4-6 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 14. Click OK to accept the properties for use later and close the dialog box.

To repeat the last command, do one of the following:

Click Edit > Repeat last command
Press Enter

Create Foundation Level Base Plates

Next, create base plates at the 0'-0" level for the remaining columns
1. Press the Enter key to start the base plate command again, or click once on the
component in the Component catalog to restart the tool.
2. Create the rest of the foundation level base plates by picking each column and then the
position for the base plate.

Create Interior Column Base Plates for Mezzanine Level

1. Open the Component Catalog by clicking on the Find component icon or by typing
Ctrl-F.

2. We want to use U.S. Base plate (1047). Type 1047 for the search value.
3. Double-click the component to open the U.S. Base Plate (1047) dialog box.
4. Go to the Anchor Rods tab and change the Grout thickness to be Above the insertion
point.
5. Click Apply to accept these properties and leave the dialog box open.
6. Select the D|3 mezzanine column as the main part.
7. Select the base of the column using the endpoint snap and the base plate connection will
be created.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the other mezzanine columns (D|5, D|7, E|3, E|5, & E|7).

Create Perimeter Column Base Plates for Mezzanine Level

1. In the U.S. Base plate (1047) dialog box, select the pre-saved BP_W14pinned settings
and click Load.

2. Select Apply.
3. Select the steel column at grid intersection C|1.
4. Pick the base of the column using the endpoint snap and the base plate will be created.

Engineering: Connections
4-7
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 5. Interrupt the current command.
6. In the open Base plate properties dialog box switch to the Parts tab, change the plate
height to 2'-8", select the component and select Modify.

7. In the Bolts tab, change the vertical distance value to 16", and click Modify

8. Select OK to set the values for the remaining base plates to be created and close the dialog
box.

9. Create the base plates for the remaining exterior columns.

10. Interrupt the command.

Steps 6 and 7 above could have been combined into one modify action, but were
broken up to illustrate how to refine the settings of a component gradually as a new
user, which provides a better understanding of the various component settings.

Next, we will model steel-to-steel connections at strategic locations in the model to save time.
For example, we would want to model connections where we plan to make elevation views,
section cuts, and details. Any further modeling beyond those areas may end up being counter-
productive.

Engineering: Connections
4-8 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Beam-to-Beam Connections
Shear Plate
Use the Shear plate simple (146) connection to make the beam-to-beam web connections at
the skewed ends of the mezzanine level beams. Weld the shear plate to the primary beam web
and bolt to the secondary beam web.
1. Open the Component Catalog dialog box (Ctrl+F or binocular icon) and find the Shear
plate simple (146) connection.

2. Single-click on its icon to activate the tool using the default values.
3. Pick the skewed beam between grid intersections C|5 and D|7 as the
main part of the connection.
4. Pick a filler beam along its length to be the secondary part and the
connection will be created.
5. Repeat to place remaining shear plate connections along the skewed
beam.
6. Interrupt the command.

To quickly reactivate the connection command, click on the Create current connection
icon. This command uses the last applied connection settings.

Two Sided Clip Angle

We will now use the Two sided clip angle (143) along gridline D at the mezzanine level and
along grid line 6 where two secondary beams meet at a primary beam.
1. In the Component Catalog, find and select the Two sided clip angle
(143) connection.

2. Place the first connection at the D|4 gridline intersection, by selecting

the D|3-D|5 beam as the main part.
3. Then select the C|4-D|4 beam as a secondary part.
4. Next, select the D|4-E|4 beam as a secondary part.
5. Click the middle-mouse button to end the selection process and complete the connection.

6. Interrupt the command.

7. Modify the connection, if desired, and Apply the new settings.

Engineering: Connections
4-9
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 8. Reactivate the Two sided clip angle connection.
9. Create the remaining similar connections along grid lines D and E.
10. Interrupt the command.

Clip Angle
A Clip angle (141) connection needs to be created at the offset beam near the grid intersection
of F|6 and at the beam midway between D|3 and D|4.
1. Open the Component Catalog.
2. Find and select the Clip angle (141) connection.
3. Select the E|6-F|6 beam as the main part.
4. Select the intersecting offset beam as the secondary part. The connection
is created.
5. Select the D|3-D|5 beam as the main part.
6. Select the filler beam between D|3 and D|4 as the secondary part.
7. Interrupt the command.

Beam-to-Column Connections
Clip Angle
We will create Clip angle (141) connections at the beam-to-column
intersections of D|3, E|3, and F|6 on the mezzanine level.
1. Open the Component Catalog.
2. Find and select the Clip angle (141) connection.
3. Select the D|3 column as the main part.
4. Select the intersecting D|3-D|5 beam as the
secondary part. The connection is created.
5. Select the D|3 column again as the main part.
6. Select the D|3-E|3 beam as the secondary part. The
connection is created.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for the E|3 intersection.
8. Repeat once again for the F|6 intersection.
9. Interrupt the command.

Engineering: Connections
4-10 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
End Plate
We will create End plate (144) connections along gridlines 3 and 6 at the roof level.
1. Open the Component catalog.
2. Find and select the End plate (144) connection.
3. Select the C|3 column as the main part.
4. Select the intersecting C|3-F|3 rafter as the secondary part. The
connection is created.
5. Select the C|6 column as the main part.
6. Select the intersecting C|6-F|6 rafter as the secondary part. The connection is created.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for the intersections at F|3 and F|6.
8. Interrupt the command.

Two Sided End Plate

We will create Two sided end plate (142) connections to the beam-to-column-to-beam
intersections of C|3, F|3, C|6, and F|6.
1. Open the Component Catalog.
2. Find and select the Two sided end plate (142) connection.
3. Select the C|3 column as the main part.
4. Select the intersecting C|2-C|3 HSS brace as a secondary part.
5. Select the intersecting C|3-C|4 HSS brace as a secondary part.
6. Click the middle mouse button, and the connection is created.
7. Interrupt the command to adjust the component settings.
8. Double-click the placed component to open the Two sided end plate (142) properties
dialog box.
9. In the Plates 1 and Plates 2 tabs change the end plate dimensions (t=1/2, b= 6”1/2, h =
1’-2”).

Engineering: Connections
4-11
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 10. In the Haunch tab, turn off the haunch plates using the appropriate option image
selection.

11. In the Bolts tab, change the bolt spacing to 11” in the vertical for both sides of the
connection, the gage value to 4”, and the positioning of the bolt groups to Middle.

12. Click Modify.

13. Apply the properties, enter HSS8X4 in the Save As field and click Save as to store the
settings for future use. Click OK to apply the settings for the next created instances and
close the dialog box.
14. Reactivate the component by clicking in the
icon in the Component Catalog.
15. Select the C|6 column as the main part.
16. Select the intersecting C|5-C|6 HSS brace as a
secondary part.
17. Select the intersecting C|6-C|7 HSS brace as a
secondary part.
18. Click the middle-mouse button, and the connection is created.
19. Repeat steps 3 through 10 for the intersections at F|3 and F|6.
20. Interrupt the command.

Engineering: Connections
4-12 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Bracing Connections
Bolted Gusset
We will use the Bolted Gusset (11) system component along gridline 6 for the horizontal
bracing at the roof level. We will also use a modified version of this connection at the top of
the Chevron Brace on gridline 3.

Roof Bracing
1. Open the Component Catalog.
2. Find and select the Bolted Gusset (11) connection.
3. Select the C|6-F|6 rafter as the main part.
4. Select the first brace as a secondary part.
5. Select the adjacent brace as a secondary part.
6. Click the middle-mouse button, and the connection is created.

7. Interrupt the command.

8. Double-click on the connection to open its properties dialog box.
9. Change the bolt spacing on the Brace bolts 1 and Brace bolts 2 tabs to 2.

10. Click Modify and OK.

11. Re-activate the connection command.

12. Create the remaining brace connections along the C|6-F|6 rafter.
13. Interrupt the command.

Engineering: Connections
4-13
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Chevron Bracing
1. Double-click on one of the Bolted gusset (11) connections to open the component's
properties dialog box.
2. Load the pre-saved HSS_2_Middle_of_Beam settings.
3. Click OK.
4. Activate the Select objects in components select switch.

5. Click the Create current connection icon to

activate the connection command.
6. Select the D|3-E|3 mezzanine beam (elev. 42'-0")
as the main part.
7. Select the two HSS braces as secondary parts.
8. Click the middle mouse button and the connection
is created.
9. Repeat this process to create the connections for the two Chevron Braces along column
line 7.
10. Interrupt the command.

Welded Gusset
We will use the Welded Gusset (10) connection with pre-saved settings at each base of the
Chevron Brace on gridline 3.
1. Open the Component Catalog.
2. Find and Double-click on the Welded Gusset (10) connection.
3. Load the pre-saved HSS_Brace settings.
4. Select OK.
5. Select the D|3 column as the main part.
6. Select the HSS brace as the secondary part.
7. Click the middle-mouse button and the connection is created.
8. Select the E|3 column as the main part.
9. Select the HSS brace as the secondary part.
10. Click the middle mouse button and the connection is created.

Engineering: Connections
4-14 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 11. Repeat this process to create the connections for the two Chevron Braces along column
line 7.
12. Interrupt the command.
13. Activate the Select component select switch.

Joist-to-Beam Connections
Interior Joist Bearing
We will use the Joist to Beam, type 1 (160) component to create
connections for the joists bearing on beams along grid lines 3 and 6.
1. Open the TRUE ROOF PLAN view and the 3d view (View > View List...)

2. Use the Window > Tile Vertically menu option to arrange the two views side by side, and
zoom in both to where you can see the grid line 3 rafter.
3. Double-click on the Joist to Beam, type 1 (160) icon in the Component Catalog and
load the Not_Bolted attribute. Click Apply and add the component to one of the interior
joists along grid line 3 by selecting the rafter first and then the joist. Then right click >
Interrupt to stop the component application.

Note that the joist runs to the beam centerline; this needs to be adjusted for joists bearing end
to end.

Engineering: Connections
4-15
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 4. If the component’s dialog box is open, select the component. If it is not, double-click on
the component to open it.
5. On the Picture tab, change the projection of the top chord to -1/2”, and click Modify.

6. Click OK to apply the properties and close the dialog box.

In order to easily apply this component to all of the joists that bear on column lines 2 and 3, we
will need to modify the view properties so that only rafters and joists are visible. This is
required because components do not use selection filters when picking the primary and
secondary members.
7. Double-click in the background of the TRUE ROOF PLAN view to open the View
Properties dialog box and then click on the Object Group button.

8. Enter RAFTER JOIST in the value field of the row that has Part > Name > Equals and
click Modify.

9. Reactivate the component and select the rafter on grid line 3.

10. In the TRUE ROOF PLAN view, drag a box from right to left, starting on the right side of
column line 3, around all of the joists that are bearing on that beam, and ending on the left
side of column line 3 near F line – this is a crossing selection.

Engineering: Connections
4-16 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 All the joists crossed by the selection window now have the connections created.
11. Repeat this for the joists along grid lines 2 and 6.

With the view selected you can use the right-click > Redraw view option to clean up
the view according to the Display options.

Perimeter Joist Bearing

Next, apply the current component settings to the joist closest to grid D|1. These joists will
need to have the top chord extended in order to support the roof deck.
1. If the component dialog is open, select the component symbol (pyramid or cone). If it is
not, double-click on the symbol to open it.
2. Change the top chord extension to 6”, and click Modify.

Engineering: Connections
4-17
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 The top chord is now extended beyond the beam centerline.

3. Click OK and create the component using this setting to all of the perimeter joists along
columns lines 1 and 7.

Intermediate panel points

To create conceptual joists with panel openings, use the Joist Panel Opening
tool. This tool works with conceptual (detailing) joists that have end connections
in place and is designed to create a drawing and collaboration friendly model.
4. Open the Component catalog (Ctrl+F).
1. Enable the Snap to Geometry Lines / Points (F5) button.
2. Double-click on the Joist Panel Opening component.
3. Enter 10 in Number of panels field.

4. Click OK.
5. Select the joist between column lines 1 & 2 that is closest to line C.

Engineering: Connections
4-18 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
6. Select the near side of the cut in the joist web as the start point.

7. Select the near side of the cut in the joist web as the end point.

8. Select the connection symbol (the green pyramid).

9. Right click and select Copy Special > To Another Object.

10. Select this joist as the source object.

11. Select all of the joists between column lines 1&2, 2&3, and 6&7 as the destination objects.

Engineering: Connections
4-19
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 12. Double-click in the background of the TRUE ROOF PLAN view, set the Object Group
back to standard, and click Modify.

If you know that you need to create the visual web openings for a collaborative model,
you can add the end connections and panel openings to one joist before copying.
Components will copy with a part even if the part is the only thing selected.

Check a Connection
To make it easier to check the connection you created, you can create views from different
sides of a selected connection. In the view, the work area is closely fitted around the
connection.

Create Connection Default Views

To create component basic views:
1. Select the connection symbol (the green cone).
2. Right-click and select Create View > Default Views of Component, and four basic views
(front, top, end and perspective) appear.

Engineering: Connections
4-20 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 To remove extra information, such as fitting indicators, and part cuts, from a
view's display, double-click in the view, select Display from the dialog box, de-
select all the items under Visibility In components except for Parts, Bolts, and
Holes. Select Modify to update the view.

Check Clashing Of Steel Structures

Before creating connections, all of the members in the model usually collide with other
members. By using the Clash check tool, we can check which parts in the model collide. We
will run a clash check now.
Home › Instructions › Modeling Guide › Checking the model › Detecting clashes

Check Clashing
1. Activate the Select objects in components select switch.
2. Pick the parts to check by selecting an area in the model.
3. Right-click and select Clash check.
Tekla Structures displays the colliding parts in the Clash Check Manager dialog box. You can
see that many of the parts in the model collide. This is because we did not add components at
every connection in our model. Select any row from the list and Tekla Structures highlights the
parts in the model. Double-click on a row and the active view will be zoomed and fitted to the
clashing parts.

Engineering: Connections
4-21
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Engineering: Connections
4-22 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Drawings
Engineering

Tekla Structures 19.1

2013 Engineering Basic Training
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Copyright© 1992-2013 Tekla Corporation. All rights reserved.

This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this
Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets
certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines
permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. Please refer to
the License Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights.

In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil
and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.

Tekla, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product and company
names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party
product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and
disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.

Elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European
Union and/or other countries.
Contents

5 Drawings............................................................................................. 3
5.1 Drawing Basics......................................................................................................... 4
Drawings and Model Integration ............................................................................. 4
Modeling Details vs. Drawing Details .................................................................... 5
Drawing Workflow .................................................................................................... 6
General Arrangement (GA) Drawings..................................................................... 7
5.2 Drawing Properties .................................................................................................. 8
Setting Drawing Properties ...................................................................................... 8
Setting Drawing View Properties............................................................................. 9
5.3 Creating Construction Drawings ........................................................................... 10
Foundation Plan ..................................................................................................... 10
First Floor Framing Plan ........................................................................................ 12
Mezzanine Framing Plan ....................................................................................... 13
Frame Elevation Drawing ...................................................................................... 14
5.4 The Drawing List .................................................................................................... 16
Opening a Drawing ................................................................................................ 17
Closing a Drawing .................................................................................................. 17
Flagging a Drawing as Locked .............................................................................. 17
Flagging a Drawing as Issued ............................................................................... 18
Flagging a Drawing as Revised ............................................................................ 18

Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-i
 Engineering: Drawings
5-ii Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
5 Drawings

In this lesson
This lesson introduces the basics of creating construction drawings in Tekla Structures.
You will learn:
Drawing concepts
How to create and apply settings to plan drawings
About the Drawing List
How to create drawing objects
Basic revision control

Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-3
 5.1 Drawing Basics
The construction drawings created from Tekla Structures can display all the information
contained in the physical model database. The appearance of the information (parts, part
marks, tables of data) can be standardized based on the user's needs. The creation and updating
of changed drawings is automated based on the direct link between the physical model and the
drawings. To get this type of drawing automation to work effectively, it is important that the
modeler creates and names parts appropriately so that the pre-defined (or custom) drawing
standards work as expected (see the Model Discipline section in the Coordination Practices lesson).
Tekla has developed some out-of-the-box construction drawing standards using the modeling
attributes contained in the Engineering Role (previously discussed in the Model Discipline
lesson). These drawing settings are for the three main types of views on drawings: plan,
elevation, and section or detail. Engineering firms can use these settings as an example of what
can be accomplished using good model discipline and the corresponding drawing standards.
The ultimate goal is for the engineering firm to determine their own drawing standards which
can then be used with the automation tools to perform much of the initial setup of the project
drawings (border, font height, font style, line weights, etc.), just as the Tekla Engineering
Role settings do. Firms can even correlate their existing layering standards (names, colors, etc)
to their Tekla Structures standards. Engineering firms can greatly improve their drawing
productivity once these standards are established and fully implemented for their office.
You can find more information in Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Drawing
Guide > Introduction to Drawings.

Drawings and Model Integration

Tekla Structures stores all the important
project information in the model. Drawings
and other printouts such as reports, NC data
files, etc. are output produced directly from
the model.

The Model
The model contains all of the important project
information:
Part geometrical and structural
information
Part marking
Part properties
Bolts
Assembly information
User defined attributes
All of the modifications must be done directly in the model.

Engineering: Drawings
5-4 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 The Drawings
The drawings are current views of the members contained in the model with added definitions
for:
the sheet size to be used
the way titles and tables are placed on the sheets
what is dimensioned and how
which marks are displayed and how
and more
You can create drawings at any stage of a project.

Changes in the Model

Changes in the model members can cause out-of-date drawings. The following are examples of
changes that affect the drawings:
Changes in a part's profile or geometry
Adding or deleting parts
Moving parts
Tekla Structures automatically updates the related drawings to changes in the model.

Modeling Details vs. Drawing Details

When Tekla Structures is used to generate
construction drawings, it is most efficient to model
just enough to create accurate drawings. The
drawings in Tekla Structures can be thought of as
"views" rather than drawings. The actual "drawing"
should be minimal if the model is built appropriately.
Of course, lines and text can be added in the Tekla
Structures drawing mode, but a two-dimensional
approach does not capitalize upon the synchronization
between the model and the drawings. For example,
instead of drawing bent plate pour stops or slab
construction joints in the drawing mode, those parts
should be created in the 3D model. Using the system
components and user-defined custom components
can speed this process. The custom components can
be saved with specific settings which then become the
"typical details" for future projects. You can then add
those components to the model at the necessary
locations and cut drawing sections and details.

Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-5
 Drawing Workflow
The figure below illustrates the hierarchy in defining appearance rules within the Tekla
Structures drawings. Baseline rules (level 0) per drawing type can be overwritten on a view-
by-view (level 1) or part-by-part (level 2) level. It is important to note that the Main Drawing
Properties are used to initially set up the drawing and provide general overall settings. Once the
drawing is set up, it is recommended that you make modifications to the View or Part level
settings rather than the Drawing level settings. In the second image below, the buttons circled
in blue should only be used only in the Main Drawing Properties level of settings.
Established standards can be carried into the drawings at the View level (or Drawing level)
through the use of Detailed Object Level Settings, which are rule sets used to sort, or classify,
parts and part marks. The rule sets, or Detailed Object Level Settings, use defined selection sets,
or Filters, in conjunction with defined object settings. Detailed Object Level Settings provide an
automatic method for changing the appearance and content of various drawing objects, i.e.
Parts, Part Marks, Bolt Marks, etc. For example, you can set up all foundation drawings to show
footings as dashed lines and provide the footing size or other design information by default.
Furthermore, you can make an individual footing look solid. The key is to develop Detailed
Object Level Settings that will minimize the time needed to "clean-up" drawings.

Engineering: Drawings
5-6 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Once the views are established on a drawing, they can be modified in three ways:
Modify parts and part marks one by one.
Make the appearance of all parts and the content of part marks the same.
Make the appearance of each part and its part mark unique using Detailed Object Level
Settings at the View (preferred by most) or Drawing (viable for some) Level.
The first two methods of modifying the view appearances will be covered in the Drawings 2
lesson. The important concept to note is that method one in combination with method two
can be a very effective way to generate engineering drawings without the need to set up
Detailed Object Level Settings. Using methods one and two can be a great first step in generating
engineering drawings from Tekla Structures. Once the basics are learned with that approach
the Detailed Object Level Settings can be created to further automate the drawing management
process. This customization of the Detailed Object Level Settings (method 3) is covered in the
Admin Module.

General Arrangement (GA) Drawings

In Tekla Structures, the drawing type which is most useful to engineering firms is the General
Arrangement (GA) drawing. GA drawings can contain several views, including the whole
model or any part of it. With the GA drawing type you can provide erection, foundation and
other plans, as well as details from views in the model.
You can create general arrangement drawings from one or several named model view(s) with
the following options:
Create one drawing for each selected view
Add all selected views to one drawing
Create an empty drawing

Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-7
 When empty drawings are created and opened in the Drawing Mode, you can add named
model views to them, move views from one drawing to another and even create additional
drawing views from existing drawing views.

You cannot modify the view angle of drawing views in Drawing Mode after the view has
been added to the drawing. Therefore, it is a good idea to check and modify the
appearance of model views in Model Mode before creating GA drawings from those
mode views. For example, check that the plan views are really 2D views, and rotate the
rendered 3D views to the orientation which you want them shown in the drawing view.

In the examples in this lesson, we will create general arrangement drawings from our
Eng_Model (created and modified in the previous lessons) by including several named model
views in the drawing.

For those using a Full or Detailing license, you do not need to number the model or
update numbering to create or open general arrangement drawings.

5.2 Drawing Properties

This section discusses how to set up a construction plan drawing using the provided drawing
settings and the model from the Basic Modeling 2 lesson. The out-of-the-box settings are based
on the premise of using the Detailed Object Level Settings at the drawing view level rather than
the drawing level. These allow the user to place plan views, elevation views or section views
(each with potentially different appearance settings) on the same drawing sheet. If your firm
does not place differing view types with differing appearance settings on the same drawing then
the Detailed Object Level Settings can be used at the drawing level quite effectively.

Setting Drawing Properties

Drawings are set up by loading one of the drawing level setting sets listed below or provided
by your Tekla Structures administrator.
Calcs – for letter size sheets with detailed views to aid with markup or calculations
Drawing_Setup – for general, large sized drawing sheets
Pile_Layout – for generating a plan view drawing of pile layout

Using the Drawing_setup to set up your first drawing is recommended because it does not
show part marks by default (and therefore will take less time to open). The other settings do
have some set appearances which the user can experiment with to see what initial drawings
might look like. At this drawing property level, the user will define the:
Name – Drawing Sheet Number
Title – Drawing Sheet Name
Layout – Inside the Layout sub-dialog box, the user can load other options for their
titleblock

Engineering: Drawings
5-8 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 The Layout Properties dialog box allows the user to save settings such as sheet size and
related title blocks and/or schedule templates that they want to include on a drawing.
Different layouts can be created for different architectural clients with different title block
borders. Foundation, column, and other schedule templates can also be referenced into a
layout setting (these are generally set up by an administrator).

The provided title block templates are generic templates supplied as examples and can
easily be superseded by placing templates with the same name in the model folder,
project folder, or firm folder.

Setting Drawing View Properties

With the initial drawing size and border set up, the views in the drawing can be modified,
using view settings, after the drawing is created. To apply the engineering Detailed Object Level
Settings to any type of plan drawing, the Plan setting is loaded and applied to the individual
views. Multiple rule sets are used in the Plan view setting which manage the appearance of the
objects and their attributes for most types of plan drawings (foundation plans, floor plans, roof
plans). The settings for both concrete and steel members are defined within this single plan
view Object Level Setting.
Elevations and section detail views should be modified with the Elevation and Section / Detail
view settings, respectively. Note that the Elevation view settings have only a few and the
Section / Detail view settings do not have any Detailed Object Level Settings in use. More can be
added, however, by the user or their Tekla Structures administrator.

Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-9
 5.3 Creating Construction Drawings
It is a good idea to go through the model views that you plan to use to create drawing views in
order to verify that they are displayed in the view orientation the way you want, i.e. they are
set to the plane view and not rotated.
1. Open the PLAN AT EL. 0”, PLAN AT EL. 23'-6, and PLAN AT EL. 42'-0” views.
2. Switch them each back to a planar orientation (Ctrl+P) as required. You may also wish to
reduce the work area by selecting the model, right-clicking, and selecting Fit Workarea to
Selected Parts > In All Views.

3. Check that the View Depth in the display properties is appropriate for each view.

Foundation Plan
First we will create a foundation plan for our model.

Create the Drawing

1. Select Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing…
2. In the dialog box select the plan view to be shown in drawing (PLAN AT EL. 0”).
3. Check the Open drawing check box.
4. Click Drawing properties…

Engineering: Drawings
5-10 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
5. In the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box, Load the Drawing_Setup
settings.
6. Name and Title – Add an appropriate name and title for the drawing.

7. Layout – Load the desired title block and tables setting.

8. Click OK in the General – Layout Properties dialog box.

9. Click OK in the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.
10. Then click Create in the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box. A drawing
that contains a plan view of the model should appear; if not, use the Drawing List to open
the drawing.

Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-11
 Change the View Properties
1. Double-click on the view boundary (solid gray line) to open the View Properties dialog
box.
2. Load the pre-saved Plan settings.
3. Verify that the Size box is unchecked as we don't want the view extrema (dashed magenta
line) to change.
4. Select Modify and close the dialog box (Cancel or "x").
5. Adjust the view extrema as needed. If the extrema box is not showing select the view
boundary to select the view.
6. Close the drawing by selecting Close Drawing from the File menu or by clicking on the
red "x" in the upper right corner of the drawing window.
7. Select Yes at the prompt for keeping changes to the drawing. Leave the Create a
snapshot option selected if you want to generate a zoom-able image of the drawing’s
current state.
For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Drawing
Guide > Editing Drawings > Drawing Views > Modifying drawing views.

Note that if the elevation values after the "TFE" call out are empty it is because, by
default, the reference elevation for this view is the view itself. In other words, all the
foundation elements are at the elevation of the view cut. To define a datum for the view
level itself, go to the Attributes 2 tab in the View Properties dialog box and change the
Datum point for elevations to Specified. For example change the datum elevation to -
100'-0" which results in the foundation view datum being at 100'-0".

First Floor Framing Plan

The next drawing we will create is a framing plan for the first floor.

Engineering: Drawings
5-12 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Create the Drawing
1. Open the Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing… dialog box.
2. Select the PLAN AT EL. 23’-6” view.
3. Check the Open drawing box.
4. Click the Drawing properties… button, in the dialog box.
5. Name and Title – Type in an appropriate name and title for the drawing.

6. Click OK.
7. Then in the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box select Create. A drawing
that contains a plan view should appear; if not, use the Drawing List to open the drawing.

Change the View Properties

1. Double-click on the view boundary to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Load the pre-saved Plan settings.
3. Verify that the Size box is unchecked as we don't want the view extrema to change.
4. Select Modify and close the dialog box (Cancel or "x").
5. Adjust the view extrema as needed.
6. Close and Save the drawing. Remember to save the model as well.

Detailed Object Level Settings for the hollow core slabs have not been created or linked
to the Plan view properties settings, so the general settings are used for the view.

Mezzanine Framing Plan

The last plan drawing we will create is for the mezzanine level.

Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-13
 Create the Drawing
1. Select Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing… to open the
dialog box.
2. Select the PLAN AT EL. 42’-0” view.
3. Check the Open drawing box.
4. Click the Drawing properties… button, in the dialog box.
5. Name and Title – Type in an appropriate name and title for the drawing.

6. Click OK.
7. Then, in the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box select Create. A drawing
that contains a plan view should appear; if not, use the Drawing List to open the drawing.

Change the View Properties

1. Double-click on the view boundary to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Load the pre-saved Plan settings.
3. Verify that the Size box is unchecked as we don't want the view extrema to change.
4. Select Modify and close the dialog box (Cancel or "x").
5. Save the drawing.
Repeat the same process for each additional plan you generate.

Frame Elevation Drawing

The process for creating elevation drawings is very similar to the process used to create plan
drawings. We will create one as an example.

Engineering: Drawings
5-14 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Create the Drawing
1. Verify that the views of ELEVATION ON GRID 3 and ELEVATION ON GRID 6 are planar.
2. Select Drawing & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing… to open the
dialog box.

3. Select the elevation views to be shown in the drawing (GRIDS 3 and 6).
4. Verify that the Options list is set to All selected views to one drawing.
5. Check the Open drawing box.

6. Select Drawing properties…

7. In the dialog box, Load the Drawing_Setup settings or use the standard.
8. Name and Title – Type in an appropriate name and title. This information will be
referenced into the drawing border.

9. Scale – Go to the View properties dialog box and change the scale to the desired ratio.
Select Apply.
10. Layout – Load and Apply your border setting. One of two provided borders can be
loaded using the 24x36 or 30x42 presets.

Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-15
 11. Select OK in the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.
12. Then select Create in the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box. A drawing
that contains elevation views should appear.

Change the View Properties

1. Double-click on a view boundary to open the drawing View Properties dialog box.
2. Load the Elevation settings.
3. Uncheck the Scale and verify that the Size box is unchecked as well.
4. Use the Ctrl key to select the second view.
5. Click Modify.
6. Adjust the view extrema, if needed.
7. Close and Save the drawing.

The bracing members have a partial profile representation and part mark callout that
includes the member size and axial force. These settings are unique to the Elevation view
setting loaded.

5.4 The Drawing List

We will briefly cover the Tekla Structures drawing list.
You can use the drawing list to:
Select and open your drawings for viewing and editing in the Drawing Mode
Update, clone and delete drawings
Update GA drawing labels
Display and filter drawings shown in the list
Choose drawings to select parts in the model, or show only the drawings of the
selected parts in the list (not available for GA drawings)
Lock, freeze and issue drawings
Add revisions to drawings
Modify properties of several drawings at a time
The drawing list also displays the creation and modification dates of the drawings, drawing
sizes, types, etc.
All of your existing drawings are shown in the drawing list. The status of drawings is
represented by flags, which are shown on the left hand side of the drawing list. You can sort
the order of the drawings by clicking the desired header line button in the drawing list. You
can adjust the column widths of the drawing list and Tekla Structures will keep the changes.
Use the buttons on the right hand side of the drawing list to change the status of a drawing.
Alternately, select the drawing in the list, right-click to open the pop-up menu and change the
drawing status.
Engineering: Drawings
5-16 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 For more information about drawing status flags, see Tekla User Assistance: Home ›
Instructions › Drawing Guide › Finding and opening drawings › Drawing status flags ›
How to read the drawing status information and Home > Instructions > Drawing Guide
> Finding and opening drawings > What is displayed in the Drawing List. This is accessed
through the Help > Tekla Structures Help menu selection or by pressing F1.

Opening a Drawing
You can only have one drawing open at a time. If you already have a drawing open, Tekla
Structures prompts you to save that drawing before opening the next one.
To open the drawing list and a drawing in Tekla Structures:
1. Select Drawing & Reports > Drawing List… from the menu or click the Open drawing
list icon on the Drawing tools toolbar.

2. In the drawing list select the previously created G [1] drawing.

3. Select Open, or double-click on the drawing to open it in Drawing Mode.
For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Drawing Guide >
Finding and opening drawings.

Closing a Drawing
To close the drawing in Drawing Mode:
1. Select Drawing File > Close (Back to Model) from the menu or click the "x" in the
upper right corner of the drawing window.
2. Tekla Structures asks if you want to save the changes when you have made changes to the
drawing. The save option will not appear it you have not made changes to the drawing.
3. Select Yes to keep the changes that you have made to the drawing, or close the drawing
without saving by clicking No.

Freezing – When the model changes, Tekla Structures will update the parts and
drawing objects in frozen drawings, but will not adjust any elements added manually,
such as extra marks or dimensions. For more information see Tekla User Assistance:
Home > Instructions > Drawing Guide > Working with drawings >
Freezing drawings.

Flagging a Drawing as Locked

Lock flags are added to selected drawings when the Lock button is clicked. This
functionality prevents GA and other drawings from accidental deletion.
To lock and unlock a GA drawing:

Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-17
 1. Select the G [1] drawing in the drawing list.
2. Select the Lock - On button and the Locked icon will appear.
3. Try to delete the drawing by selecting Delete.
4. Try to open the drawing by selecting Open.
5. Select the Lock - Off button to reset the lock.
6. Select Open. The drawing opens in the Drawing Mode.
You cannot open or delete a locked drawing without unlocking it.

Flagging a Drawing as Issued

Issue flags are added to the selected drawings when the issue button is clicked. The
flag appears automatically on issued GA drawings that have been modified or changed. To issue
a GA drawing:

1. Select the G [1] drawing in the drawing list.

2. Select the Issue - On button and the Issued icon will appear.
3. Open the drawing to view the GA drawing title block information.
4. Check that the issue date is shown correctly.

You can reset the Issued flag by toggling the status.

Flagging a Drawing as Revised

A revision mark value can also be tagged to the drawing along with description fields for a
revision block on the drawing.

Engineering: Drawings
5-18 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
1. Select the G [1] drawing in the drawing list.
2. Select the Revision… button and the Revision Handling dialog box will open.
3. Enter the desired Revision Mark and descriptive values in the provided fields.
4. Click Create; the mark is added to the drawing listing and the drawing count is increased
by one. The preset title block does not incorporate the revision data, but others may.

Multiple drawings can be flagged with the same revision data by selecting the drawings to
which the revision data applies and completing the process described above. If the
desired revision mark has already been created, select the drawing where it was created
in addition to the untagged drawings. The revision data will be available and you can
click Create to add the revision to the drawings.

Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-19
 Engineering: Drawings
5-20 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Stairs and Handrails
Lesson

Tekla Structures 19.0

2013 Steel Basic Training
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Contents

BT01Stairs and Handrails .......................................................................... 3

BT01.1 Create a Stair ..................................................................................... 4
Create the stair view..................................................................................... 4
Create the stair ............................................................................................. 6
Finishing the bottom of the stringers ......................................................... 11
Create Handrails on Stair ..................................................................................... 14
Create left side Guardrail ........................................................................... 15
Create left side Grab Rail........................................................................... 29
Create right side Guardrail ......................................................................... 37
Create right side Grab Rail ........................................................................ 41
BT01.2 Create Railing at landing and floor ................................................. 45
Create Handrail .......................................................................................... 45
BT01.3 Prepare the Assemblies for drawings ............................................. 58
BT01.4 Create Drawings .............................................................................. 64
Stair Drawing .............................................................................................. 64
Handrail Drawing ........................................................................................ 70
Change the Handrail BOM type ................................................................. 73

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
i
BT01 Stairs and Handrails

In this lesson we will introduce you to some basic miscellaneous modeling tasks that you need
to know when detailing projects with miscellaneous assemblies. We will use the model we
create in lesson 1 and add a stair and handrails to this model. Many of the basic modeling
functions that you learned in previous lessons will be used in this lesson. After the model is
completed we will create the necessary drawings for shop fabrication of these assemblies.
You will learn how to:
Model in a stair and handrails using several miscellaneous system components
Utilize various components to connect the stair and handrail
Utilize various modeling tools to complete the stair and handrail assemblies
Create a shop drawing of the stair
Create shop drawings of handrail assemblies

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
3
BT01.1 Create a Stair
In order to add a stair to our model we first must add two points; one at the bottom and one at
the top nosing points. Study the contract drawing to determine the locations of the nosing
points.

Create the stair view

1. Click on the open named view list icon.
2. This opens the Views dialog box shown below. Move the BLDG 1 PLAN AT EL. 12-
7"1/2 view into the Visible views side. Click OK.

3. From the View menu select View Properties…

4. Select and Load the Elevation View attribute and change the Name field to ELEVATION
ON STAIR A.

5. Click OK.
6. Activate the Create view using two points tool.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

4 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 7. Hold CTRL and click at the intersection of grid lines A and 5 to set a reference for the
start point.
8. Aim along grid line 5 towards B and type a distance of 4’-0”, then Enter.
9. Aim to the right and snap perpendicular to grid line 6.

This will create a view at the center of the stair, for inserting it using the stair component.
Create the nosing points
We will now add the point that will mark the center of the top tread nosing by using the Point
Array tool.
1. Select Modeling > Add Points > On Plane... This opens the Point Array command
which will allow you to locate a point at a reference direction and distance from any other
point.
2. Select top of the beam on grid line 5 at El. 12’-7 1/2” – notice the Origin values change
as shown below.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
5
 3. In the Coordinates section of the Point array dialog box, type the values shown. Then
click Create, which adds the point seen above.
The Point Array tool adds points a defined distance away from a picked origin position in the
model view. We have created a reference for a top nosing point 5” off of grid line 5, 4” above
T.O.S.
4. Now go down to the 0” elevation and click at the intersection of 0” and grid line 6 as a
reference. Again, notice the Origin values change as shown below.

5. In the Coordinates section of the Point Array dialog box, type the values shown. Then
click Create, which adds the point seen above.
Now we have the top and bottom nosing points defined as required by the stair component.

Create the stair

1. Click the Find a component icon.
2. Enter 74 and click Search.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

6 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
3. Double-click on the Z pan (S74) icon to open up its dialog box.
4. Load Stair_All from the drop-down list.

5. On the Picture tab, change the top and bottom framing conditions and enter the values
shown in the fields below.

6. Apply the properties and Save As BasicTrg_Stair_A.

7. Click OK to close the dialog box.

The picking and selection order for creating a stair is dependent on the
options you select here on the picture tab. If no beams are selected at the
top or bottom, then the picking order should not include those parts in the
model. You cannot change a stair from one type to another after it has been
created.
The bottom nosing option will affect whether or not a tread is created at the
bottom of the stair. Take note of the red point indicated in the dialog box
and whether it is at the nosing for a tread or at finished floor.

8. In the ELEVATION ON STAIR A view, click the lower point just off grid 6 and then the
upper point that we created for the top nosing point near column line 5.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
7
 9. Next click the top beam where the stair will connect.
10. Finally, middle-mouse-click to end the command and a new stair will be created in the
model.
11. Right-click > Interrupt.

Always pick the bottom (lower) point first and then the top (upper) point when
using any of the Stair components. Also remember to middle-mouse-click
when you are done picking the 2 points and members if they are being
considered.

Check stair dimensions

1. Check the stair tread and rise values. Using the Measure horizontal distance and
Measure vertical distance tools, add the dimensions shown below to the elevation view.

If everything has been done correctly, the values should come out to 6-3/4” and 11"
Looking at the top of the stairs, you will notice that top fill plate is too long.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

8 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
1. Make sure Select Components is pressed down.

2. Double-click on any part of the stairs to open up the Z Pan (S74) dialog box.
3. On the Z pan tab enter the values in the fields shown below.
4. Apply the properties and re-save the BasicTrg_Stair_A attribute.
5. Click Modify.
From the image you can see that we are adjusting the distance from the top nosing point to the
back edge of the plate on the beam, and the distance from the bottom nosing point to the
bottom of the plate to the finished floor.

Notice that there is a field for pan thickness and a UDA field for gage. The gage UDA reflects
on reports and drawings, but does not change the physical thickness of the tread. You MUST
change the other field shown below to be the thickness of the gage material. You do not need
to figure what the 128th equivalent is for the gage material. Simply enter in the decimal
thickness and Tekla Structures will convert it to a 128th increment.

After making these changes to the stair, the top fill plate should look like the next image.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
9
 At the bottom of the stair, the plate will now come down to the finished floor at El. 0’-0”.

Before we added this stair to the model, we loaded the Stair_All setting. That saved attribute
has all of the welds saved as shop welds. If you want to change the assembly, click on the
Welds button and modify the appropriate welds to site welds.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

10 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Due to the complex nature of stairs, not all stairs can be created 100% with the
system components. Use the system Stair components to get as much as you can
and then model in the rest.

Finishing the bottom of the stringers

We will now create the bases for the stringers using regular system components. First we
must change the selection switch from Select Components to Select Objects in
Components.

This way we can select individual stringers instead of the overall stair. Otherwise, the system
component we add for the base plate will not know to which member to add the connection.
Also make sure you have Snap to geometry lines/points selected, or you will not be able to
snap to the edges of your stair pans.

1. Double-click Stairs base detail (1043) from the Component catalog. The Stair base
detail (1043) component dialog box opens.

2. Select the Base_Condition_Left settings from the drop-down list and click Load.

Note the small red X and dimensions on the picture tab. The X indicates the point that the
component is expecting us to pick when we actually apply this to a stringer. The dimensions
are the resulting locations/shape from that point. The picked location should be the corner of
the bottom nosing so everything is placed from that point.
3. Make sure the value shown in the next image matches the rise for our bottom nosing – 6-
3/4”.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
11
 The 1/2" dimension provides clearance from the bottom of the stringer to the finished floor.
4. Click Apply.

To make it easier to see which stringer we are working with, type the ‘V’ key to
relocate the point of rotation and click towards the bottom of your stair. Then
you can rotate your elevation view to look at it from other angles.

5. Pick the left stringer and then the snap point at the bottom tread nosing point as shown.

This cuts the stringer as shown and adds a base angle.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

12 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
6. With the command still active, load the Base_Condition_Right setting, click Apply, then
modify the right side stringer.

7. Right-click > Interrupt.

8. Select the stringer and right-click > Inquire > Assembly to see if all intended pieces are
shop attached to the stairs.

This reveals that the bottom riser is not part of the assembly so there is access to the base
angles in the field.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
13
 Create Handrails on Stair
To create the required handrail system, we will learn to use several system components; S76,
S77, 88, 89, and 90.
So that we can better measure and work on the handrail bends, we will create two model
views, one at each stringer. We will also use these views to ensure that the handrails are on
the center of the stringers.
Create views
1. In the PLAN AT EL. 12’-7”1/2 view, zoom in to the top of the stair.
2. Go to the View > View Properties menu and select Elevation from the drop down menu,
and click Load.

3. Make the changes shown above and click Apply.

4. Using the Create view using two points command, select the mid-point at the end of the
stringer for the first point and then a perpendicular snap at the edge of the beam flange.

5. Go back to the still-open View Properties dialog box, and change the name to Left
Stringer Elev, and click OK.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

14 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Use the Create view using two points command again to create the left side stringer view.
6. In the PLAN AT EL. 12’-7”1/2 view, pick the mid-point at the end of the stringer just to
the right of grid 5 for the first point, and then the perpendicular at grid line 5 for the
second point. Right-click > Interrupt.

Create left side Guardrail

Create stanchions
1. Open the Component catalog and search for component S76.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
15
 2. Double-click on the Stanchions (S76) icon to open the dialog box.

3. Select the Posts_Up_Stringer settings and click Load.

4. We need to change the fields shown above to affect the number of stanchions, and work
point to first and last post distances.
Stanchion height 3’-6”.
3” from start and end points.
4’-0” maximum spacing.

The ‘Use selected’ option under the stair parts selection allows you to pick
multiple objects including landing beams to continue the posts on. This allows
you to include objects that were created manually as well as parts that are
included in a larger component.
The other option, ‘use all’ will group parts that were in the same component –
which may work in some cases but in others may cause problems.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

16 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Note the 1” dimension for the nosing line to the top of the stringer – this is taken into account
when determining the length of the post to achieve the desired height of the top rail. This will
not be read from the stair automatically, but must be set to match the current stair in the
model.

5. Click Apply and Save these settings as BasicTrg_StairA.

The red X’s shown on the Picture tab of the Stanchions (S76) dialog box
indicate the beginning and end of the run of posts that will be created. The first
and last posts will be created in relation to these picked locations.

6. At the prompt to Pick first position, in the Left Stringer Elev. view, pick the outside
edge of the closure plate at the end of the stringer.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
17
 7. At the prompt to Pick second position, pick the edge of the horizontal closure plate on
the top end stringer, on the grid line.

8. At the prompt to Pick objects, click on the stringer, and then the horizontal closure plate.

9. Finish with a middle-mouse-click to finish the command.

It is necessary to choose the horizontal plate, because the last post will be
created beyond the end of the channel flange and will be supported by it. If you
did not choose the plate here, the component would not be created successfully.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

18 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 10. Right-click > Interrupt.
Check dimensions
Take a moment to check the dimensions of the posts that were created. The top rail created by
the handrail component we will use soon is located by the top of these posts.
1. Activate the Add construction line tool.

2. Under one of the posts in the middle of the stringer, create a construction line from one
nosing to the next.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
19
 3. Activate the Measure vertical distance tool.
4. Click on the top of the post above the construction line you created.
5. Activate the Snap to extension lines icon.

6. Aim down and snap to the intersection where the centerline of the post would meet the
construction line, and click.

7. Click to place the dimension to the left. Verify it is 3’-6” from the top of the post to the
nosing line.
8. Turn off Snap to extension lines.
Next measure the post at the top of the stringer that is bearing on the horizontal closure plate.
9. Use Measure vertical distance to check from the top of the post down to the top nosing.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

20 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Because the post is on top of the closure plate, it sits 1/4" too high from the nosing/finished
floor level.

Modify Stanchions
1. Press down the Select Components icon.

2. Double-click on one of the posts to open up the S76 dialog box.

3. Change the below value to 1/4" to account for the plate thickness that the post is bearing
on.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
21
 4. Click Modify.

5. Apply the properties and re-save these settings as BasicTrg_StairA.

6. Next open the Component catalog and search for component S77.

7. Double-Click on the Railings (S77) icon to open the dialog box.

8. Select and Load the PicketRails_Up_Stringer_wBottomreturn setting.
9. On the Picture tab, make the following changes below and shown in the next image.
Distance from top rail to bottom rail – 3’-0”

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

22 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
10. On the Vertical Rails tab make the changes shown below.
Picket spacing to Equal.

11. Click Apply to set these properties.

12. Starting from the bottom, Pick each post in succession until you reach the top, and then
middle-mouse click to finish and create the guard rail.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
23
 Modify Return Bend Lengths
Next we will modify the return at the bottom of the rail.
Bottom of Rail
The guard rail and the grab rail will end 1’-11” from the bottom nosing. However, the
component works from the last post.
1. Use Measure horizontal distance to find the dimension from the nosing to the first post.

It should measure as 3/4".

2. Highlight the railing with Select components pressed down, and change the fields
below:
Dimension of 1’-11-3/4” from the center of the post to the end of the return.
Dimension of 1’-6” from the top rail to the bottom of return.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

24 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
3. Click Modify. The result will look like the next image.

Make sure that the dimension to the top rail from the 0’-0” elevation is correct.
4. Use Measure vertical dimension to check the dimension from 0’-0” to the center of the
top rail.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
25
 It should measure 3’-5-15/16” from the floor. The dimension should be 3’-6”, and in this
situation it may be close enough, in others you may need to adjust the height to meet
specifications.
5. Right-click in the view and select Redraw to remove the dimension.
6. Click the Add construction line icon to activate the command.

7. Hold Ctrl and click on the 0’-0” grid line to set a reference.
8. Type the letter O if necessary to turn on Ortho tracking and aim up in the Z direction.
9. Track to 3’-6” and click, or type 3’-6 and Enter to start the construction line.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

26 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
10. Click again directly to the side to create a horizontal construction line. This is where we
want the rail to be.
11. Create another construction line using the end points snap along the center of the sloping
section of rail.

12. Use Measure horizontal distance to check from the center of the vertical part of the
return, back to the intersection created by the construction lines.
This is where the bend needs to begin in order to set the return height.

13. Make sure Select Components is pressed down, and highlight the rail component.
14. In the S77 dialog box, change the value shown in the next image to 1’-0” to change where
the bend occurs.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
27
 15. Delete the construction lines and re-check the dimensions to the rail.

16. Save the railing settings by clicking Apply, then typing BasicTrg_Rail in the save as
field and clicking Save as.
Finish top rail at top post
Zoom back in to where the top rail meets the top post. You can see that the component did not
create a clean corner where they meet. We will use Fit part end cuts to miter the corners.
1. Switch to Select objects in components.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

28 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 2. Activate the Fit part end command.
3. Select the top rail, and then pick two points at a 45-degree angle to miter the end.

4. Repeat the Fit part end for the post.

The Fit part end command extends as well as trims the part.

Create left side Grab Rail

1. In the S77 dialog box, Load the Grab_Rail settings.
2. On the Picture tab, change the selection option to Use selected.
3. On the Middle Rails tab, change the profile to PIPE1STD.
4. Click Apply.
5. Starting from the bottom, Pick each post in succession until you reach the top, and then
middle-mouse click to finish and create the grab rail.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
29
 Adjust properties of grab rail
Earlier we added a construction line across the nosing points so we could measure the post
height, now we can use that as a reference to measure the grab rail height.
1. Use Measure vertical distance to measure from the grab rail at the post to the
construction line. Use Snap to extension lines to make it easier.
2. Also measure from the top of the post to the grab rail.

It currently is located 2’-6” from the nosing line, and 1’-0” down from the top of the post. We
will adjust it so the grab rail is 2’-10” from the nosing.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

30 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
3. On the Middle Rails tab, there is a setting for how many rails to create, and where in
relation to the top rail. Change this to 8”, and click Modify.

4. Re-check the dimensions to verify 2’-10” from the nosing line.

We want the grab rail to extend 1’-0” from the nosing at the top and 1’-11” at the bottom.
First adjust the top. As before, S77 references the posts, so in order to get that dimension we
have to find where the last post is in relation to the last tread.
5. Use Measure horizontal distance to check the dimension from the nosing to the last post.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
31
 6. In the S77 dialog box, on the Middle Rails tab, enter 10” as shown below to extend the
end of the grab rail at the top of the stair.

Take note that the drop-down option is set to extend from the center of the last post.
7. Click Modify.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

32 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 If you want the grab rail to be rolled instead of mitered, change the bend option
on the Middle Rails tab.

At the bottom we need to lay out where the bend should stop and the grab rail become flat
with the finished floor.
8. Click the Add construction line icon to activate the command.
9. Hold Ctrl and click on the 0’-0” grid line to set a reference.
10. Type the letter O if necessary to turn on Ortho tracking and aim up in the Z direction.
11. Track to 2’-10” and click, or type 2’-10 and Enter to start the construction line.
12. Create a second construction line along the center of the sloping grab rail.
13. Use Measure horizontal distance to check the dimension from the post to the
construction line intersection, and the intersection to the return as shown in the next
image.

14. On the Middle Rail tab in the S77 dialog box, change the drop-down option for the rail
extension to include both the bend and the flat section.
15. Enter the dimensions you took from the model in the fields shown in the next image.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
33
 16. Click Modify.

17. Apply and Save these settings as BasicTrg_Grab_Rail.

Finish ends of grab rail
Finally we will finish the ends of the grab rail, returning it to the guard rail return at the low
end, and placing a cap on the high end.
1. At the low end of the grab rail, switch to Select objects in components and double-
click on the rail to open the Beam Properties dialog box.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

34 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
2. Click OK to apply those properties for the next beam object we will create and close the
dialog box.
3. Click Create beam.
4. Click at the end of the grab rail to place the first point of the return. Because this view is
located at the same plane as the center of the guard rail, the first point is actually there.

To connect to the grab rail we can use relative snap.

5. Type the letter R to activate the relative snap.
6. Enter the values 0,3,0 (0” in the X, 3” in the Y, and 0” in the Z) and type Enter.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
35
 7. Open the 3d view and zoom in to this location.
8. In the Component Catalog, select the drop-down for search results and choose Stairs
and Railings.
9. Find the Railing_Mitre component and single-click on the thumbnail to activate it.

10. Click on the newly created short pipe section, and then the end of the grab rail.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

36 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 11. Next zoom to the top of the grab rail.
12. In the Component Catalog, find the Rail end caps component and single-click on the
thumbnail.

13. Click on the rail, and then the end point to place the cap.

Create right side Guardrail

1. Open the Right Stringer Elev view.
2. In the Component Catalog, find and double-click on the Stanchions (S76) component
to open the dialog box.
3. Select the BasicTrg_StairA setting and click Load, then Apply.
4. At the prompt to Pick first position, pick the outside edge of the closure plate at the end
of the stringer.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
37
 5. At the prompt to Pick second position, pick the edge of the horizontal closure plate on
the top end stringer, on the grid line.

6. At the prompt to Pick objects, click on the stringer, and then the horizontal closure plate.
Finish with a middle-mouse click.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

38 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
We will create a railing that goes up the stringer, then turns a 180-degree corner and wraps
around the stair opening. To do this, we need to adjust the location of the top post, since the
next post for the handrail will be bearing on the beam flange and they should line up.
The post is currently 3” from the grid line.

7. Switch to Select components and highlight the stanchion component.

8. Change the dimension for the distance to the last post to 1-3/4” as shown in the next
image.
9. Click Modify.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
39
 10. Click Apply and Save these settings as BasicTrg_StairA_Right.
11. Open the Railings (S77) dialog box.
12. Load the BasicTrg_Rail setting and click Apply.
13. Working from the bottom, pick each post in succession until they are all selected and then
middle-mouse click.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

40 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Create right side Grab Rail
1. Select and Load the BasicTrg_Grab_Rail setting in the S77 dialog box. Click Apply.
2. If necessary, single-click on the thumbnail in the Component Catalog to activate the
component, and working from the bottom, pick each post in succession until they are all
selected and then middle-mouse click.
This creates the grab rail, but it is on the wrong side of the guard rail – the outside of the stair.
3. With Select components pressed down, highlight the newly created grab rail.
4. On the Picture tab, change the offset dimension for the middle rail to 3”, and click
Modify.

The grab rail is now on the correct side, but the brackets are not oriented correctly.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
41
 On the Middle Rails tab, in the bottom right there is a setting that calls in the component that
creates the bracket. There are saved attributes for this bracket to adjust its orientation.
5. Click on the button at the end of the Attribute file field.

6. In the Attribute File List dialog, choose the Post-Right_Side option and click OK.

7. Click Modify in the S77 dialog box.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

42 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
At the bottom of the right side grab rail create a return to the vertical part of the guard rail
return.
8. Switch to Select objects in components and double-click on the last section of grab rail
to open the Beam Properties dialog box.
9. Click OK to set these properties.

10. Click Create beam.

11. Pick at the end of the grab rail – again, since the view is actually at the center of the
guard rail, this is where the start point will be.
12. Type the letter R to activate the relative snap, and type 0,-3,0 (0” in the X, -3” in the Y,
0” in the Z) and then Enter.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
43
 13. In the Component Catalog, single-click on the Railing_Mitre component.
14. Pick on the newly created pipe section, and then the existing grab rail.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

44 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 The grab rail will be wrapping around and continuing along the landing, so there is no need
for the top end to project so far past the post.
15. Switch to Select Components, and double-click on the grab rail to open the S77 dialog
box.
16. On the Middle Rails tab, change the extension value past the last post to 0”, and click
Modify.

17. Click Apply and Save these settings as BasicTrg_Grab_Rail_Right.

BT01.2 Create Railing at landing and floor

Now we will begin adding the horizontal railing along the beam 7’-0” North of grid line A.
We will add this set of posts by working in the PLAN AT EL. 12'-7”1/2 view.

Create Handrail
1. Double-click the Stanchion (S76) component from the Component catalog and Load
the Posts_Offset_Connx2flange setting.
2. On the Picture tab, make the following changes:
Distance to first post from point is 1-3/4”.
6’-0” maximum post spacing.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
45
 Distance to last post from point is 2”.
Offset the post group 1-1/2” to the right of the handles.
Height of post from finished floor of 3’-6”.
Floor thickness of 4”.

3. Click Apply and Save As BasicTrg_Landing.

4. Now use the Endpoint snap to make sure you click the ends of the beam as shown in the
next image.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

46 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
5. Once the End Points 1 and 2 have been clicked, select the supporting beams 3, 4, and 5,
then middle-mouse-click. This adds the stanchions as shown on the next page. Notice it
added stanchions based on the spacing we indicating in the dialog box.

6. Now add the stanchions around the corner of the landing. Make the changes as shown
below to Stanchions (S76).

7. Go to the Parts tab and eliminate the first post by entering 0” in the First Stanchion
profile field.

8. Click Apply and Save As BasicTrg_Landing_Return.

9. Pick the first point at the intersection of the beams we finished on for the last run of
stanchions, then the face of the column at A/6 for the second point. Finish by selecting
the beam on 6 line, then middle-mouse-click.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
47
 The distance from the post to the column face is a critical dimension we need to hold, even if
the column size changes. We can bind the component to the column face so if it gets larger or
smaller, the last post will always remain 4” away.
10. Press Ctrl+4 to change the parts in the view to solid rendering.
11. With Select components pressed down, highlight the last stanchion group so the start
and end handles are visible.
12. Hold down the Alt key and drag a box from left to right around the end (magenta) handle.

13. Right-click and select Bind to plane.

14. Hover over the face of the column so the plane is visible, and click.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

48 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 This will create a small dimension to indicate the 0” distance binding from the handle to the
face. This will remain 0” even if the column size changes.

If the column size changes, the Stanchions (S76) component will automatically
adjust the spacing of the posts, but the Railings (S77) component will not
automatically adjust. In order to get the rail to adjust to the new post spacing, all
you have to do is double click on the rail to open the component properties and
then click Modify.

Guard Rail
1. Double-click the Railing (S77) component from the Component catalog to open it.
2. Select and Load the BasicTrg_Rail properties, and make the following changes:
Left side return to open ended top and bottom rail.
Dimension of 0” past the first post.
Remove dimension to bend that is no longer there.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
49
 3. Click Apply and Save As BasicTrg_Rail_Landing.
4. Switch to Select objects in components.
5. Select the stanchions at the landing, first the top post of the stair handrail, then the first
post of the run along the stair opening, then middle mouse click to create the first
section of horizontal rail.

6. Repeat the command for the landing sections of straight rail.

The handrail cannot be applied around a corner as one large section. Apply it in
straight sections and then join them together later.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

50 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Grab Rail
1. Select and Load the BasicTrg_Grab_Rail_Right settings.
2. On the Middle Rails tab, change the drop-down setting on the left side to end in a straight
rail, and change the extension past the post dimension to 0”.

3. Click Apply and Save As BasicTrg_Grab_Rail_Landing.

4. With Select objects in components pressed down, apply the grab rail in the same
fashion as the guard rail around the stair opening – each straight section separately.

5. Switch to Select components and highlight the last section of grab rail on grid line 6.
6. On the right side of the dialog (meaning the last post clicked in the model) change the
extension dimension to 1-1/2” and click Modify.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
51
 Notice how this adds a separate piece of grab rail that is only 1-1/2" long.

7. With Select components pressed down, double click on the grab rail to open the
component properties dialog box.
8. Go to the Parameters tab, change the Middle rail cuts to At max length and click
Modify.

Add end cap

1. In the Stairs and Railings search group in the Component Catalog, activate the Rail
end caps component.
2. With Select objects in components pressed down, select the end piece of the grab rail
near the column at A/6.
3. Click the endpoint of the grab rail to create the end cap.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

52 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Create Corner Elbows
1. Double-click the Railing beam to plane (89) component from the Component catalog
to open the properties dialog box.

2. Load the Corner_Bend (Top) attribute and click OK to apply the properties and close the
dialog box.
Select the end post first and then the horizontal rail. The far right corner of the handrail
system should look like the image below.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
53
 Create elbows on grab rail
1. Double-click the Railing plane to plane (90) component from the Component catalog
to open the properties dialog box.

2. Load the Corner_Bend (Top) attribute and click OK to apply the properties and close the
dialog box.
3. Pick one side of the grab rail and then the other. If the component fails to go in, try
picking in the reverse order.
The result should look like the next image.

4. Repeat at the corners of the grab rail where the stair meets the landing.

Top rail at posts

1. Zoom in to the top of the post at grid line 6, where the railings form a corner.
2. Double-click on the Rail Fitting-Side Outlet Elbow component under the Stairs and
Railings search group to open the dialog box.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

54 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Take note of the picking order in the lower left image on the Picture tab of the
dialog box. Also note that this component allows you to create this corner part
as a Bought Out Item – something ordered out of a catalog rather than
fabricated with the rest of the handrail.

3. Bought Out Item should be set to yes, so enter a catalog number in the next field:
SOE150.

4. Click Apply, and then pick the parts carefully noting the order from the dialog box.
Middle-mouse click to finish.

5. Repeat at the end of the run near the top of the stair, as shown in the next image.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
55
 6. Repeat again at the top of the stair handrail.
The Polybeam bend of the top rail is too close to the post and the component gets created at
the wrong location.

You can see that the fitting is created as if the railing continued up at the same slope.
7. Select the component and right-click > Explode component.
8. Open the Right Stringer Elev view and zoom to the top of the stair.
9. Delete the fitting that is cutting the post on an angle.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

56 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
10. Activate the Snap to geometry lines / points (F5) button.
11. Select the side out elbow > Right-Click > Move Special > Linear.

12. Pick a point on the top of the side out elbow and then a point on the top of the hand rail.
13. Uncheck the dx and dy coordinates to move the elbow in only the Z direction and click
Move.

14. Use Fit part end to cut the post at the bottom of the side out elbow.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
57
BT01.3 Prepare the Assemblies for drawings
1. Select the Select Assemblies selection switch.

2. Move your mouse over the right side handrail and notice that the entire rail system
highlights.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

58 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
This means that if we were to produce an assembly drawing of this item, everything would be
shown on the drawing and the result would be difficult to read, fabricate, or ship to the field.
To avoid this we will separate this assembly into 3 smaller assemblies by modifying the welds
that join the assemblies at the locations where we want to split the assemblies.
1. Zoom in to the rail fitting component at the top of the guard rail where they form a corner
on grid line 6.
2. Switch to Select components and double-click on the Rail Fitting – Side Outlet Elbow
in the model.

3. On the Welds tab, change the #3 weld to a Site (flag) weld, and click Modify.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
59
 This is the weld between the corner fitting and the top rail, but the welds still exist in the
model between the top rail and the post. We do not have that level of control over the
individual welds in the S77 component so we will just delete them.

Here you have a choice to keep the rail as an intact component or exploding it
because we are manually modifying the welds.
If you keep it intact, it retains the intelligence and ability to update. If it ever
does update, then the manually edited welds will revert back to how they were
when the rail component was originally created.
If you explode it, you don’t have to worry about the welds changing back, but
then the component loses the ability to update to any changes made.

4. Make welds visible in the model view by double-clicking in the view background to
bring up the View Properties dialog box, and then click Display.

5. Make sure that both boxes under Welds are checked, then click Modify.

You can see two welds show up in the vicinity of where the top rail would meet the post.
6. Switch to Select objects in components and select one of the welds and right-click >
Inquire.

If the top rail and post highlight, then right-click > Delete. Make sure you get both welds.
Moving below that component, the elbow bend we created on the grab rail at the corner also
does not have control for individual welds.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

60 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
7. Select one of the welds between the grab rail along grid line 6 and the elbow.
8. Right-click > Inquire on the weld.
The rail sections will illuminate to show the parts that this particular weld is joining together.

9. Double-click on the weld symbol.

10. In the Weld Properties dialog box, change the Workshop/Site drop down to select Site
(flag) weld. Click Modify.

This will be necessary at the grab rail for the weld between it and the elbow, and also between
it and the bracket on the corner post (see next image).

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
61
 The component has not created a weld at the bottom rail directly between it and the post, so
there is nothing that needs to be done there in this instance.
11. When you switch back to Select assemblies, you should see just the short section of
landing handrail highlighted as shown in the next image.

Repeat these steps for the other end of the landing railing near the top of the stair.

12. Switch to Select components and double-click on the Rail Fitting – Side Outlet Elbow
in the model.
13. On the Welds tab, change the #2 weld to a Site (flag) weld, and click Modify.

14. Select the 2 welds at the bottom of the side out elbow that attached the post to the rail and
modify them to be site welds.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

62 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Make sure to inquire on any weld before making a change to verify the objects being attached
by it.

When finished use Select assemblies to verify 3 separate rail sections on that side.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
63
BT01.4 Create Drawings
Stair Drawing
Next we will create an Assembly drawing of the Stairs. First we must get our numbering up
to date.
1. Use what you learned in earlier lessons to load and apply the settings for after creating
drawings and then run a modified numbering.
2. From the Drawings & Reports menu, go to Create Drawings.
3. In the model, press down on Select objects in components and then highlight one of
the stair stringers.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

64 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
4. In the Master Drawing Catalog, select Stairs_with_BOM (A) and click Create
drawings.

This will create an Assembly drawing of the Stairs, which has been added to our Drawing
List.
5. Click the Drawing list icon to open it.
6. Double-click on the Stair Drawing to open it.
First, we may want to change the scale of the drawing, if we want to add an opposite view for
the other stringer.
7. Double-click in the drawing background to bring up the properties dialog box, click
View.

8. On the following Assembly – view properties dialog box, go to the Attributes tab and
change the scale to 1:16.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
65
 9. Go to the Shortening tab and set Cut Parts to No.

10. Click Modify.

Edit how the drawing appears
1. Double-click on the view border to open up the View properties dialog box. Change both
the Depth down and Depth up fields to 4” as shown and click Modify.
2. Click OK.

Create section view

3. Click the Create section view icon.

4. In the top view on the drawing, select two points along the heel of the left (bottom)
stringer to define a section view plane.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

66 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
5. Next select a point to define the corner of the section view we are about to create.

6. Then select a point define the other corner of the section view, on the other end of the
stringer.

7. Finally, pick the insertion point for the section view.

This adds the newly created section view to the drawing.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
67
 8. Notice that the section view came in upside down since it was cut from the top view.
Select the view border, right-click, and then select Rotate view.

9. In the Angle field type 180 and click Rotate.

10. Double click on the view border of Section A-A to open the View Properties dialog box.
11. Modify the view label as shown in the next image by going to the Label tab, then
clicking on the button at the end of the A1 text field. Highlight the elements in the mark,
then change the height to 1/4" and click Modify.
12. Apply the Mark contents properties and Save as BasicTrg_Name.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

68 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
13. Apply the View Properties and Save as BasicTrg_Stair_Section.

14. Double Click on the main view to open the View Properties dialog box.
15. Load the BasicTrg_Stair_Section attribute.
16. Go to the Label tab and type B – B in the A1 field and click Modify.

17. Select the view border of Section A-A > Right Click > Align Horizontally.
18. Select the bottom of the stringer in Section A–A to establish the base point.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
69
 19. Pick the bottom of the stringer in the main view (B–B) to establish the point to align with.
20. Go to the Annotating menu and select the Add section mark command.
21. Along the heel of the right (top) stringer add the section symbol, picking from left to
right.
22. Double-click on one of the new section symbols to open the Section symbol properties
dialog and change the Section Name to B.
23. Click Modify.
24. Finish cleaning up the stair drawing by adding, deleting, and moving any and all
necessary dimensions required for your shop.
25. Once finished, close and save the stair drawing.

Handrail Drawing
1. Repeat the steps to create a drawing for one of the handrails. However, this time use the
setting Handrail_with_BOM (A) from the Master Drawing Catalog list. An example of a
handrail drawing should look like this.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

70 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
The default setting for handrails is to list Total Length in the drawings BOM.

If this is desired then all part marks need to be removed from the drawings. If not, skip down
to the section about changing this BOM in the Project Setup.
1. Double-click in the drawings background. Then click the Part mark… button.
2. In the Main part section, remove the <<Part position>> element.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
71
 3. In the Secondary part section, remove the <<Part position>> element.

4. Apply the properties and Save As MainPart_Assembly_Position.

5. Click Modify.

The reason that the part mark for the side out elbow is still visible is
because it is a Bought Out Item. The Handrail_with_BOM drawing
has an Object Level Setting that controls that part mark.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

72 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 6. Click OK to close the Assembly – Part Mark Properties window.
7. Apply the Assembly Drawing properties and Save As BasicTrg_Handrail_with_BOM.

8. Finish cleaning up the handrail drawing by adding, deleting, and moving any and all
necessary dimensions required for your shop. Remember the 3 levels of editing drawings.
9. Once finished, close and save the handrail drawing.

Change the Handrail BOM type

1. From the File menu, select the Project Properties… option. Then click the User-defined
attributes… button to open up the dialog box shown here.

2. On the More Drawing Switches tab, change the option shown above to No and click
Modify. Click OK.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
73
 3. Now when you re-open the handrail drawing, the BOM lists each individual part as
shown here.

Steel: Stairs and Handrails

74 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
 Tekla Structures
Detailing Guide

Product version 17.0

December 2010

© 2010 Tekla Corporation

© 2010 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this
Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain
warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines
permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information
set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License
Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not
guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make
changes and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and
criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xroad, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product
and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a
third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party
and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights reserved.
EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.
XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.
DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights
reserved.
FlexNet Copyright © 2010 Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. All Rights Reserved. This product
contains proprietary and confidential technology, information and creative works owned by Flexera Software, Inc.
and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. and their respective licensors, if any. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display,
modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior
express written permission of Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. is strictly prohibited. Except where
expressly provided by Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. in writing, possession of this technology
shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc.
intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
The software is protected by U.S. Patent Nos. 7,302,368 and 7,617,076. Also elements of the software described in
this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including
U.S. patent applications 2004267695, 2005285881, 20060004841, 20060136398, 20080189084, and 20090189887.
Conventions used in this guide
Typographical The following typographical conventions are used in this guide:
conventions

Font Usage
Bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. This font
is used, for example, for window and dialog box titles, box and
button names, and list items.
Italic bold New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context
for the first time.
Monospace Extracts of program code, HTML, or other material that you would
normally edit in a text editor, appear in monospaced font.
This font is also used for file names and folder paths, and for any
text that you should type yourself.

Noteboxes The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:

A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing

things.

A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can
also point you to other information in this guide that you might find
useful.

You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this
one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your
time.

This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that

is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 3
Contents

Conventions used in this guide ........................................................................................................................... 3

1 Getting Started........................................................................................... 9
1.1 Basics of components............................................................................................................................. 9
Component concepts ....................................................................................................................... 10
Component dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 11
Selection order ................................................................................................................................. 13
Up direction ...................................................................................................................................... 13
Automatic and default properties ..................................................................................................... 14
General tab ...................................................................................................................................... 15
Design and Design type tabs ........................................................................................................... 16
1.2 Component catalog............................................................................................................................... 17
Using the component catalog........................................................................................................... 18
Symbols ..................................................................................................................................... 19
Pop-up menus ........................................................................................................................... 20
Thumbnail images............................................................................................................................ 21
Descriptions and keywords .............................................................................................................. 21
Grouping components...................................................................................................................... 22
Copying components to another folder ............................................................................................ 22
Customizing and saving components .............................................................................................. 22
1.3 Using components ................................................................................................................................ 23
Creating components ....................................................................................................................... 24
Example: Adding an end plate ......................................................................................................... 24
Example: Adding a base plate and anchor rods .............................................................................. 25
Example: Adding a beam to column connection .............................................................................. 26
Viewing components ........................................................................................................................ 27
Modifying components ..................................................................................................................... 27
Conceptual components .................................................................................................................. 27
Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component .................................................. 28
Tips on working with components .................................................................................................... 29
1.4 Defining parts and plates ...................................................................................................................... 29
Using the dialog box......................................................................................................................... 29
Dimensioning parts .......................................................................................................................... 30
Plates ........................................................................................................................................ 30
Beams ....................................................................................................................................... 30

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 4
 Part position number ................................................................................................................. 31
Using the Components tab ........................................................................................................ 31
Defining materials ............................................................................................................................ 32
Using the Components tab ........................................................................................................ 33
1.5 Defining bolts and welds....................................................................................................................... 33
Using the Bolts tab ........................................................................................................................... 33
Defining bolts ................................................................................................................................... 35
Increasing bolt length ................................................................................................................ 35
Creating holes.................................................................................................................................. 35
Number of bolts and spacing ........................................................................................................... 36
Bolt group orientation ....................................................................................................................... 36
Bolt group pattern............................................................................................................................. 37
Edge distance .................................................................................................................................. 37
Bolt position...................................................................................................................................... 37
Vertical bolt position .................................................................................................................. 38
Horizontal bolt position .............................................................................................................. 38
Defining slotted holes....................................................................................................................... 39
Deleting bolts ................................................................................................................................... 40
Defining bolt assemblies .................................................................................................................. 41
Welds ............................................................................................................................................... 41
1.6 AutoConnection .................................................................................................................................... 42
Using AutoConnection ..................................................................................................................... 42
1.7 AutoDefaults ......................................................................................................................................... 45
Using AutoDefaults .......................................................................................................................... 45
How to use AutoDefaults effectively................................................................................................. 46
Checking AutoDefaults properties.................................................................................................... 46
Checking AutoDefaults rules............................................................................................................ 46
1.8 Using the joints.def file.......................................................................................................................... 46
About joints.def ................................................................................................................................ 47
How joints.def works ................................................................................................................. 47
How to read joints.def ................................................................................................................ 47
Entering values .......................................................................................................................... 48
Connections that use joints.def ........................................................................................................ 48
Defining general defaults ................................................................................................................. 48
Defining bolt diameter and number of rows ..................................................................................... 50
Clip angle, shear plate, and end plate connections ................................................................... 50
Gusset connections ................................................................................................................... 50
Diagonal connections ................................................................................................................ 51
Defining other bolt and part properties............................................................................................. 51
Gusset connection properties .................................................................................................... 52
Diagonal connection properties ................................................................................................. 55
Profile type-dependent bolt dimensions .................................................................................... 56

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 5
 How Tekla Structures uses joints.def ............................................................................................... 57
1.9 Using Excel in connection design ......................................................................................................... 58
Setting up Excel files ........................................................................................................................ 59
Sample implementation.................................................................................................................... 59
Indicating component status............................................................................................................. 62

2 Custom Components .............................................................................. 65

2.1 Defining custom components................................................................................................................ 66
Exploding components ..................................................................................................................... 66
Defining a custom component.......................................................................................................... 66
Custom component types................................................................................................................. 70
Custom component basic properties................................................................................................ 72
Custom components in a new Tekla Structures version .................................................................. 73
2.2 Editing custom components.................................................................................................................. 73
Custom component editor ................................................................................................................ 74
Custom component browser ............................................................................................................ 76
2.3 Defining variables.................................................................................................................................. 78
Creating distance variables .............................................................................................................. 79
Creating reference distances ........................................................................................................... 81
Using magnetic construction planes................................................................................................. 84
Creating parameter variables ........................................................................................................... 85
Creating parameters that use formulae............................................................................................ 86
2.4 Functions to use in formulas ................................................................................................................. 87
Arithmetic operators ......................................................................................................................... 87
Logical statement ............................................................................................................................. 88
Reference function ........................................................................................................................... 88
Mathematical functions..................................................................................................................... 89
Statistical functions........................................................................................................................... 90
Data type conversions...................................................................................................................... 91
String operations .............................................................................................................................. 91
Trigonometric functions .................................................................................................................... 93
Framing condition functions ............................................................................................................. 93
2.5 Defining custom component properties................................................................................................. 95
Adding an option to create parts ...................................................................................................... 95
Defining bolt size and standard ........................................................................................................ 96
Defining bolt group location.............................................................................................................. 97
Replacing a sub-component............................................................................................................. 99
Changing the properties file ........................................................................................................... 101
Defining meshes in custom components........................................................................................ 102
Creating surface treatments in custom components ...................................................................... 105
2.6 Managing and using custom components........................................................................................... 105

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
 Custom component dialog box....................................................................................................... 105
Customizing the dialog box ............................................................................................................ 107
Changing the order of fields .................................................................................................... 108
Changing the location of fields ................................................................................................ 108
Renaming tabs ........................................................................................................................ 109
Adding more tabs .................................................................................................................... 109
Adding pictures ........................................................................................................................ 110
Preventing modifications ......................................................................................................... 110
Using a custom component............................................................................................................ 111
Managing custom components ...................................................................................................... 111
Exporting and importing .......................................................................................................... 112
Protecting custom components with passwords ............................................................................ 113
Performing actions on custom components ................................................................................... 113
Using Excel with custom components............................................................................................ 114
Using ASCII files with custom component ..................................................................................... 114
Tips on working with custom components ..................................................................................... 115
2.7 Custom components reference........................................................................................................... 116
Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... ................................................................ 117
Position type................................................................................................................................... 119
Display variables ............................................................................................................................ 120
Browser .......................................................................................................................................... 124
Plane types .................................................................................................................................... 125
Construction plane ........................................................................................................................ 126
Custom component settings........................................................................................................... 127
Create distance ............................................................................................................................. 128
Create reference distance ............................................................................................................. 129
Automatic distances ...................................................................................................................... 130

3 Reinforcement ....................................................................................... 133

3.1 Getting started with reinforcement...................................................................................................... 133
3.2 Basic reinforcement properties ........................................................................................................... 134
Hooks ............................................................................................................................................. 135
Concrete cover............................................................................................................................... 137
Spacing reinforcing bars ................................................................................................................ 138
Omitting reinforcing bars ................................................................................................................ 138
User-defined attributes of reinforcement........................................................................................ 139
Meshes........................................................................................................................................... 139
3.3 Working with reinforcement ................................................................................................................ 140
Placing reinforcement .................................................................................................................... 140
Attaching reinforcement to parts .................................................................................................... 141
Modifying reinforcement................................................................................................................. 141
Changing reinforcement shape ............................................................................................... 141

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 7
 Using reinforcement handles ................................................................................................... 142
Using adaptivity ....................................................................................................................... 143
Ungrouping a reinforcement .................................................................................................... 145
Grouping reinforcements ......................................................................................................... 147
Adding points to a reinforcement ............................................................................................. 148
Removing points from a reinforcement .................................................................................... 149
Splitting reinforcing bar groups ................................................................................................ 150
Splitting reinforcing bars in a group ......................................................................................... 150
Combining two reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups into one ......................................... 150
Exploding reinforcement .......................................................................................................... 150
Reinforcement geometry validity .................................................................................................... 151
Conceptual reinforcements ............................................................................................................ 151
Converting conceptual reinforcements to detailed reinforcements .......................................... 151
Customizing reinforcement meshes ............................................................................................... 151
Defining custom reinforcement components .................................................................................. 153
3.4 Single bars, bar groups, and meshes ................................................................................................. 154
Reinforcing bar ............................................................................................................................... 155
Reinforcing bar group..................................................................................................................... 156
Curved reinforcing bar group.......................................................................................................... 158
Circular reinforcing bar group......................................................................................................... 160
Reinforcement mesh ...................................................................................................................... 161
Reinforcement strand pattern......................................................................................................... 163
Reinforcement splice...................................................................................................................... 166

4 Reinforcing bar bending types ............................................................ 167

4.1 Reinforcement in templates ................................................................................................................ 188

5 User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes.................................... 191

5.1 Defining your own reinforcing bar bending shapes ............................................................................. 191
5.2 Defining rules for reinforcing bar bending shapes manually ............................................................... 193
Reinforcing bar bending shape rule settings .................................................................................. 193

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
 1 Getting Started

Introduction Once you have created a frame of parts in your Tekla Structures model, you will need to
connect those parts to complete the model. Tekla Structures contains a wide range of
components that you can use to automate the process of creating a model.
This chapter explains the basics about components - what they are and how to create them
using Tekla Structures. We will begin with the basic concepts, followed by a general
description of components properties. Finally, we will show you how to use components in
practice.

Contents This chapter is divided into the following topics:

• Basics of components (p. 9)
• Component catalog (p. 17)
• Using components (p. 23)
• Defining parts and plates (p. 29)
• Defining bolts and welds (p. 33)
• AutoConnection (p. 42)
• AutoDefaults (p. 45)
• Using the joints.def file (p. 46)
• Using Excel in connection design (p. 58)

1.1 Basics of components

Introduction Components are tools that you can use to automatically create the parts, welds, and bolts
required to connect parts. They are linked to main parts, so, when you modify a main part, the
associated component also changes.

Benefits The main benefits of working with components are:

1. You can save the properties of a component using an easily-identifiable name and keep it
for future use. For example, you could save the properties of a W12x65 column base plate
connection as W12x65.j*, and use it for several projects.
2. When you modify the size of a profile, Tekla Structures automatically modifies the
relevant components.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 9
Getting Started
 3. When you copy or move objects, Tekla Structures automatically includes all the associated
components.

Topics Component concepts (p. 10)

Component catalog (p. 17)
Component dialog box (p. 11)
Selection order (p. 13)
Up direction (p. 13)
Automatic and default properties (p. 14)
General tab (p. 15)
Design and Design type tabs (p. 16)

Component concepts
Components are tools that automate tasks and group objects so that Tekla Structures treats
them as a single unit. Components adapt to changes in the model, so that Tekla Structures
automatically modifies a component if you modify the parts it connects.
This is an example of how to apply a connection:

Select the main part.

Select the secondary part.

To see information about the connection, click the connection symbol.

The connection automatically creates the required parts, fittings, bolts,
etc.

Component types Components have the following subtypes:

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 Componen
t type Description Examples Symbol
Connection Connects two or more parts, and Two-sided clip
creates all the required objects such angle, bolted
as cuts, fittings, parts, bolts, and gusset.
welds. Corbel connection
(14)
Detail Adds a detail or a reinforcement to a Stiffeners, base
main part. A detail is only connected plates, lifting
to one part. When you create a detail, hooks
Tekla Structures prompts you to
Beam
select a part, followed by a point to reinforcement, pad
locate the detail.
footing
reinforcement
Modeling Automatically creates and assembles Stairs, frames,
tool the parts to build a structure, but does towers
not connect the structure to existing
parts. Modeling tools can include
connections and details.

System and Tekla Structures contains hundreds of system components by default. You can also create
custom your own components, custom components. They have following subtypes:
components
• connection
• detail
• part
• seam
All components are stored in the Component catalog (p. 17). To open the component catalog,
use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F.

See also Custom Components (p. 65)

Exploding components (p. 66)

Component dialog box

The component dialog box is in two sections.

Upper part Use the upper section of the dialog box to save and load predefined settings. For more
information, see Save, Load, Save as buttons. For some components the upper section also
contains buttons for accessing the bolt, weld and DSTV dialog boxes.
For information on handling the saved properties, see Connection properties files.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 11
Getting Started
 Tabs

Tekla Structures uses the automatic property value

The parts the component creates appear in yellow

The green symbol indicates the correct direction for the connection or
detail.
The parts you select appear in blue.

Tekla Structures uses the default property value

Lower part The lower section of the dialog box is divided into tabs. This is where you define the properties
of the parts and bolts that the component creates. The most common tabs that appear here are:
• Picture illustrates the component. It shows just one example, but you can usually use one
component in many situations.
• Parts is where you define the properties of the parts the component creates
• Parameters is where you set parameters to control the component (for example, for
stiffeners, end plates, chamfers, etc.)
• Bolts is where you define the number of bolts and their edge distances
• General is where you define the direction of the connection or detail and AutoDefaults
rules

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
See also Defining parts and plates (p. 29)
Defining bolts and welds (p. 33)

Selection order
To create a connection you need to select or pick existing parts or points. The default selection
order for a connection is:
1. Main part
2. Secondary part(s)
3. If there is more than one secondary part, click the middle mouse button to finish selecting
parts and create the connection.
Some connection dialog boxes illustrate the selection order for parts using numbers, as shown
below. Select the parts in the order shown in the picture:

Details The default selection order for a detail is:

1. Main part.
2. A point in the main part to show the location of the detail.

Modeling tools The default picking order for a modeling tool is:
1. Pick one to three point(s) to show the location of the objects the modeling tool creates.

Up direction
The up direction of a connection or a detail indicates how the connection is rotated around the
secondary part, relative to the current work plane. If there are no secondary parts, Tekla
Structures rotates the connection around the main part. The options are: +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, -z.
The Picture tab in the dialog box shows the up direction Tekla Structures will use. Tekla
Structures also indicates the up direction in the connection symbol:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 13
Getting Started
Manually defining To manually define the up direction:
up direction
1. Double-click the connection symbol to open the connection dialog box.
2. On the General tab, change the x, y, or z direction. Try positive directions first.
3. Click Modify to use the new values.

Automatic and default properties

Some connection dialog boxes contain list boxes that show property options as graphics. You
can select system defaults, AutoDefaults, or have Tekla Structures automatically set the
properties.

System default If you leave fields in connection dialog boxes blank, Tekla Structures uses the system default
properties properties. Manual entries, default, automatic and properties in the joints.def file, all
override these system defaults. You cannot change system default properties.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
Default and
automatic
properties Icon Description More information
To have Tekla Structures use a default Using AutoDefaults
property in a connection, select the (p. 45)
option marked with this symbol.
If you use AutoDefaults for the
connection, Tekla Structures uses the
property defined in the AutoDefaults
rules. If you are not using AutoDefaults,
Tekla Structures creates the connection
using the system default property.
If AutoDefaults have been used, the
actual picture in the default option does
not necessairly match the outcome.
To have Tekla Structures automatically
determine which option to use for a
property, select the option marked with
this symbol.
Example, Boomerang bracing
connection (60):

Use the Automatic option on the

Gussetbolt1 tab to have Tekla
Structures determine how the clip angle
is connected to the gusset plate and
beam.

See also Using the joints.def file (p. 46)

General tab
Connections and details have the same General tab. It contains the following properties:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 15
Getting Started
 Field Description More information
Up direction Rotates the connection around Up direction (p. 13)
the secondary part or detail
around the main part.
The fields next to the image
define rotation angle around
the x- and y-axis of the
secondary. The upper one is
for y- and the lower one for x.
Position in Available only for details.
relation to Select a checkbox next to the
primary part images to indicate the
position of the definition
point of the detail, relative to
the main part.
Use the Horizontal offset and
Vertical offset fields to define
the horizontal and vertical
alignment of the detail,
relative to the main part.
Locked Prevents modifications. Locking objects
Class A number given to all parts Color settings for
the connection creates. You parts
can use class to define the
color of parts in the model.
Connection Identifies the connection.
code Tekla Structures can display
this connection code in
connection marks in
drawings.
AutoDefaults Automatically sets connection Using AutoDefaults (p.
Rule Group properties according to the 45)
selected rule group. To switch
AutoDefaults off, select the
rule group None.
AutoConnectio Automatically switches the
n Rule Group connection to another
according to the selected rule
group.

Design and Design type tabs

Some component dialog boxes include a Design tab, others include a Design type tab. Use the
options on these pages to check if the component will bear the UDL (uniform distributed load),
according to AISC (ASD) specifications. This design check is intended for use with imperial
units.
The Design tab also contains options to:
• Use AutoDefaults rule groups to automatically modify component properties to take the
calculated load. To define which AutoDefaults rule group to use, go to the General tab and
select the rule in the AutoDefaults rule group list box.
For more information, see Reaction forces and UDL.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 • Use information in an Excel spreadsheet to check connection design and automatically
update component properties to bear the UDL. This is useful when you want to check
connection design according to other design codes. See Using Excel in connection design
(p. 58).

Design tab To check the design of a component that has a Design tab page:
1. Go to the Design tab and select Yes in the Use UDL listbox.
2. To use information in an Excel spreadsheet in the UDL calculation, select Excel in the
External design listbox.
3. Enter the information you want to use in the calculation in the remaining fields.
4. Select a connection in the model and click Modify. To view the results of the check, right-
click the component symbol and select Inquire from the pop-up menu.The inquire object
window opens, which contains a summary of the design checks and related information.
See also Using Excel in connection design (p. 58).

Design type tab To check the design of a component that has a Design type tab page:
1. Open the component properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Design type tab and select Yes in the Check connection list box. Tekla
Structures will check the connection each time it is used or changed in a model.
3. Enter the information you want to use in the calculation in the remaining fields.
4. Select a connection in the model and click Modify.
5. Tekla Structures checks the component. A green component symbol indicates that the
connection will bear the UDL, red indicates it will not.
6. To view the results of the check, right-click the component symbol and select Inquire from
the pop-up menu.The inquire object window opens, which contains a summary of the
design checks and related information, for example:

Primary angle, Gross shear [AISC ASD F4-1 (p5-49)]

applied = 250.00, allowable = 190.80, capacity = 1.31
FAIL (t = 0.5000, tmin = 0.6551)
Example of design check information in the Inquire object
dialog box.

• The first row shows the part checked, the name of the check and a reference to the AISC
specification.
• The second row shows the applied and allowed force and how much capacity has been
used.
• The third row shows the results and possible solutions. In this example the primary angle
plate was not thick enough. Tekla Structures has indicated the minimum thickness required
to bear the UDL.

1.2 Component catalog

Tekla Structures contains a component catalog, where all components and sketched cross
sections are stored. See also Sketched cross sections.
To open the component catalog, use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F, or click the Search
component icon on the component toolbar (see Component catalog example (p. 18)).

Topics Using the component catalog (p. 18)

Thumbnail images (p. 21)
Descriptions and keywords (p. 21)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 17
Getting Started
 Grouping components (p. 22)
Customizing and saving components (p. 22)

Using the component catalog

To open the component catalog, use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F, or click the Search
component icon on the component toolbar.
You can do the following with components and sketched cross sections:
• search using name, number, or keywords
• start creating
• view properties
• collect your own favorites
• define keywords
• edit or add descriptions
• import/export

Component This example shows the search results for the search term "Part":
catalog example

Search

View folders

View details

View thumbnails

Show/ hide descriptions

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 Create a component using the component tool you used last with its
current properties.
Double-click the name to set the properties and create the component.

Component description

Custom components have yellow symbols.

System components have blue symbols.

To sort a column, click the header cell.

You can create a list of favorite components. To add a component to your

list, right-click the component name in the component catalog, and then
select Add to Favorites in the pop-up menu.

Creating new By default, components are grouped in folders based on their type and framing condition. You
folders can add and remove components, and create folders and subfolders.
To create new folders in the Folders tree view, right-click a level in the tree and select an
option from the pop-up menu:
• Create New Folder to create folder at the same level
• Create New Sub-folder to create a folder one level below
Information on the folders you create is stored in the
ComponentCatalogTreeView.txt file that is located in the
..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\attributes\ folder.
For more information, see Copying components to another folder (p. 22).

Modifying • The default view settings for the Search view are stored in the
Search and
Folders views ComponentCatalog.txt file that is located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.
If you modify the file, the Search view and the Search results branch in the Folders view
change.
• The default tree settings for the Folders view are stored in the
ComponentCatalogTreeView.txt file that is located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.
If you modify the file, the Folders view changes.

Symbols
The first column in the catalog indicates the component types with following symbols:

Symbo
l Component type
System connections

System detail

System modeling tool

Custom connections and seams

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 19
Getting Started
 Symbo
l Component type
Custom details

Custom parts

Sketched cross sections

Pop-up menus
System Right-click a system component in the Search view list to open a pop-up menu containing the
components following commands:
• Properties...
• Edit Keywords...
• Add to Favorites
• Add to Search Result...
• Remove from Search Result
• Change picture...
• AutoDefaults...
• Import...

Custom Right-click a custom component in the Search view list to open a pop-up menu containing the
components following commands:
• Properties...
• Edit keywords...
• Add to Favorites
• Add to Search Result...
• Remove from Search result
• Change Picture...
• Export...
• Import...
• Edit Custom Component
• Delete Custom Component

Sketched cross Right-click a sketch in the Search view list to open a pop-up menu containing the following
sections commands:
• Properties...
• Edit Keywords...
• Add to Favorites
• Add to Search Result...
• Remove from Search Result
• Export...
• Import...
• Change Picture...
• Delete

See also Thumbnail images (p. 21)

Descriptions and keywords (p. 21)

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 Grouping components (p. 22)
Managing custom components (p. 111)
Sketched cross sections

Thumbnail images
Most system components have a default thumbnail image in the component catalog, which
shows you a typical situation where the component can be used. For example, this is what the
thumbnail image for Bolted gusset (11) connection looks like:

To edit a thumbnail image for a component:

1. Create an image and save it in bmp format in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder.

To create the image, you can use Create View > Default Views of
Component and Screenshot commands, for example.

2. Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog.

3. Right-click the component and select Change picture...
4. Locate the thumbnail and select it.
5. Click OK.
6. Tekla Structures links the thumbnail to the component.

Descriptions and keywords

Descriptions To view a component description, select the component in the Component catalog.

Use the button to show or hide descriptions.

You can create new descriptions and edit existing ones:
• The default component descriptions are stored in the xslib.db1 file, located in the
model folder.
• To add or edit a description, type text in the description field. When you select another
component in the component catalog, Tekla Structures prompts you to save the description
you added or edited. After you have saved the description, save the model also.
• Edited component descriptions are model-specific.

Keywords To add or edit keywords, right-click a component in the component catalog, and select Edit
keywords...
Keywords you add or edit are saved in ComponentCatalog.txt file in the current model
folder.
You can combine ComponentCatalog.txt files and move them to the system
folder:..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 21
Getting Started
Grouping components
To create a new folder based on the results of a search:

1. In the Component catalog, enter your search criteria and click Search.
2. To group the search results in a new folder, click Store.
3. In the Store search result dialog box, enter a name for the folder and click OK.
4. The new folder appears in the tree.

Removing To remove components from a group, right-click the component and select:
components from
groups • Remove, if it is a default group.
or
• Remove from search result if the folder was created from a search.

Copying components to another folder

To copy components from one folder to another:
1. In the component catalog, click the Folders icon to open the Folders view.
2. Go to the folder where the component to be copied is located.
3. Select the component, right-click and select Copy.
4. Go to the folder where you want to copy the component.
5. Right-click and select Paste.

If the copying does not succeed for some reason, store the component
temporarily to a new folder.
1. Click the Search icon and search for the component to be copied.
2. Select the component and click Store to create a new folder for the
component.
3. In the Folders view, go to the new folder and copy the component
from there to the desired folder.

Customizing and saving components

Many components are suitable for use in different situations. You can define the properties of a
component to use in a specific situation, then save a copy in the component catalog to use in
similar situations.
For example, we’ll use the Bolted gusset (11) component to connect a single brace at the base
plate of column.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 1. To save a copy of the component, we’ll right-click the component symbol in the model,
and select Publish in catalog.... The Publish in catalog dialog box appears.

2. We can add the component to a specific group. By default, the component is added to the
All group.
3. By default the component uses the same thumbnail image as the original component. To
change the thumbnail, see Thumbnail images (p. 21).

1.3 Using components

Introduction This section explains how to use components. It also includes examples.

Topics Creating components (p. 24)

Example: Adding an end plate (p. 24)
Example: Adding a base plate and anchor rods (p. 25)
Example: Adding a beam to column connection (p. 26)
Viewing components (p. 27)
Modifying components (p. 27)
Conceptual components (p. 27)
Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component (p. 28)
Tips on working with components (p. 29)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 23
Getting Started
Creating components
You create different types of component in different ways. For example, you select existing
parts to indicate which members a connection or a detail is attached to. You need to pick
points to indicate the location or length of a detail or a modeling tool. See also Selection order
(p. 13).
When you create connections, Tekla Structures prompts you to select the main part (the part
secondary parts connect to), then the secondary part(s). For an example of using a connection,
see Example: Adding an end plate (p. 24).

Status Tekla Structures uses different-colored component symbols to show the status of connections
and details:

Color Status Tip

Component created
successfully.

Green
Component created, but Often occurs when bolts or
has problems. holes have an edge distance
less than the default value for
that component.
Yellow
Component failed. A common reason is that the
up direction is not
appropriate. See Up
direction (p. 13).
Red

When applying a component that you are unfamiliar with, accept the
default properties and apply the component. Then look to see what needs
to be modified. This is quicker than trying to set the values for the
component before seeing what the component actually creates.

Example: Adding an end plate

This example shows how to create an end plate connection. The End plate (144) connection
connects two beams, or a beam to a column, using a bolted end plate.
To create the end plate connection:
1. In the component catalog, enter 144 and click Search.
2. Double-click the End plate (144) component. Tekla Structures displays the component
dialog box and starts the End plate (144) command.
3. Click Apply to create the component using the default properties.
4. Tekla Structures prompts you to select the main part (column) and then the secondary part
(beam). Tekla Structures creates the connection.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 5. Select the next main part or interrupt the command.
If you need to change the number of bolts or plate dimensions, for example, you need to modify
the component. For more information, see Modifying components (p. 27).
If you use incorrect properties, Tekla Structures may fail to create the component. For more
information, see Creating components (p. 24).

Example: Adding a base plate and anchor rods

Component catalog contains several base plate details. This example shows how to create a
base plate and anchor rods.
Before you start:
• create a column
• create an elevation view
To add a base plate to a column:
1. Open an elevation view.
2. Open the component catalog.
3. Enter base plate in the Search field and click Search.

4. To view pictures of the components in the search results, click the Thumbnails icon .

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 25
Getting Started
 5. Click Base plate (1004). This component creates a base plate with anchor bolts.
6. The prompt Pick part appears on the status bar. Select the column.
7. The prompt Pick position appears on the status bar. Pick the point at the base of the
column to indicate where to create the base plate.
8. Tekla Structures creates the base plate.
9. Examine the component to see if you need to make any changes.
10. Check that the connection symbol is green, which indicates that the connection was
created successfully.
11. Change the dimensions of the anchor rods.

To make it easier to select components, click the Select component icon .

12. Double-click the component to open the Tekla Structures Base plate (1004) dialog box.
13. Go to the Anchor rods tab. Change the dimensions of the anchor rods.
14. To change only this base plate, select Ignore other types in the list in the top section of the
dialog box:

15. Click Modify. Tekla Structures changes the dimensions of the anchor rods.
16. Click OK to close the dialog box.
17. Right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu to end the command.
18. Check that the connection symbol is green, which indicates that the connection was
created successfully.

Example: Adding a beam to column connection

Component catalog contains several beam to column connections. This example shows how to
create a beam to column connection.
Before you start:
• create a beam and a column
• create an elevation view
To create a beam to column connection:
1. Open the component catalog.

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 2. Select Beam to column connections in the list. The list of beam to column connections
appears in the main pane.
3. Select Column with stiffeners (186).
4. The prompt Pick main part appears on the status bar. Select the column.
5. The prompt Pick secondary part appears on the status bar. Select the beam.
6. Tekla Structures creates the connection.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box.
8. Right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu to end the command.
9. Check that the connection symbol is green, which indicates that the connection was
created successfully.
10. Examine the component to see if you need to make any changes.

Viewing components
You can create several views of a component to view it from different viewpoints.
To create views of a component:
1. Click the component symbol to select the component.
2. To create views, right-click and select Create View > Default Views of Component
from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures creates four views: front, end, top, and perspective.

To check dimensions, such as bolt locations and edge distances, work in

the Component front view and use the Measure tool.

Modifying components
To modify a component, double-click the component symbol in the model. The component
dialog box appears. This is where you modify the component properties.

If you have Select component switched on , you do not have to

pick component symbol, but you can just pick any object belonging to a
component. This is the only method for selecting custom parts, because
they do not have any symbol.

You can also indicate which connections and details are affected by the modifications:
• Modify connection type: If you have selected several connections details, clicking the
Modify button modifies all the selected connections and details irrespective of their type. If
the connection type is not the same as in the dialog box, Tekla Structures changes the
connection type.
• Ignore other types: Tekla Structures only modifies connections and details of the type
shown in dialog box.

Conceptual components
Conceptual components are meant to be used as reference information for further fabrication
detailing. Conceptual components look similar to detailed components but do not include the
option to change part numbering or assembly numbering settings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 27
Getting Started
 Conceptual components can be created only with Engineering and Reinforced Concrete
Detailing configurations. However, you can edit conceptual components in Full, Steel
Detailing, or Precast Concrete Detailing configurations.
Conceptual components can be converted to detailed components that include all the
information needed for fabrication, such as assemblies, cast units, and reinforcing bars. The
conversion to detailed components can be done in Full, Steel Detailing, or Precast Concrete
Detailing configurations.
Modifying part properties, such as the size of the component main part, does not automatically
convert a detailed component to a conceptual one, or vice versa. For example, if you use the
Engineering configuration and modify the model, detailed components do not convert back to
conceptual components.

Component Symbol Configuration Description

Conceptual Engineering Conceptual component
does not create
Reinforced
assemblies or cast units.
Concrete Detailing
The dialog box is the
same as in detailed
component, but does not
contain fields for part
and assembly positions.
Rectangular
Detailed Full Detailed component
contains part and
Steel Detailing
assembly numbering
Precast Concrete fields, and creates
Detailing needed assemblies and
cast units.

Round

Detailed components can be converted to conceptual components in

Engineering and Reinforced Concrete Detailing configurations.

See also Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component (p. 28)

Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component

An individual conceptual component that has been created with Engineering or Reinforced
Concrete Detailing configuration can be converted to a detailed component in Full, Steel
Detailing, and Precast Concrete Detailing configurations.
To convert a conceptual component to a detailed component:
1. Select the component symbol.
2. Click Detailing > Component > Convert to Detailing Component.

If you want to convert a detailed component to a conceptual component

in Engineering or Reinforced Concete Detailing configuration, right-
click and select Convert to Conceptual Component.

See also Conceptual components (p. 27)

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
Tips on working with components
No component If you have difficulty applying a component, check the status bar for prompts. For example,
created you may need to click the middle mouse button to stop selecting parts, before Tekla Structures
creates the component.

Many parts found If you are applying a connection that only allows for one secondary part, you may see the
message Many parts found on the status bar. This means that Tekla Structures cannot
determine which parts to connect. You may have several parts in the same location, or the view
may be set too deep.

Switch parts on/ If the component does not create the parts you need by default (for example, stiffener plates),
off look for a switch to turn them on. If there is no switch, try entering a value in the thickness field
for that part (for example, on the Stiffeners tab).
If the component creates parts you do not need, look for the switch to turn them off. If there is
no switch, enter a zero (0) in the thickness field for that part.

Default: Tekla Structures creates stiffeners or uses

value retrieved from AutoDefaults.

Automatic: Tekla Structures creates or omits stiffeners

depending on the situation in the model.

Tekla Structures does not create stiffeners

Tekla Structures creates stiffeners.

Entering valid You need to specify profiles for some components. If a component fails, try entering a valid
profiles profile.

1.4 Defining parts and plates

Use the Parts tab to define the parts that Tekla Structures creates when you use a component.

Topics Using the dialog box (p. 29)

Dimensioning parts (p. 30)
Defining materials (p. 32)

Using the dialog box

Some components list all parts on one tab, others list parts on separate tabs as shown in the
following examples.

One Parts tab Where there is one tab, the label is usually Parts or Plates.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 29
Getting Started
Several Parts Parts can also appear on separate tabs. For example, in connection 56, Corner tube gusset, the
tabs parts appear on both the Gusset and Brace conn tabs.

Dimensioning parts
Use the Parts tabs to dimension specific part types in components.

To delete a part, enter zero (0) in the t (thickness) field.

Plates
Enter the following dimensions for plates:

Dimension Description
t Plate thickness
b Plate width
h Plate height

You do not have to enter these dimensions for every component type, as Tekla Structures
determines the plate shape differently for different components. For example, in end plate
connections, Tekla Structures calculates width and height using the number of bolts and bolt
edge distances. Click Help in a component dialog box to check which dimensions you need to
enter.

Beams
To specify a library or parametric profile to use for beams:

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
• Enter the profile name.

• Or click , and select a profile from the profile catalog.

The profile must exist in the profile catalog.

Part position number

Use the Pos_no field to enter the part position number for each part the component creates.
This overrides the settings on the Tools > Options > Options... > Components tab. Specify a
prefix and a start number, as shown below.

Prefix

Start number

Some component dialog boxes have a second row of Pos_no fields for you to enter the
assembly position number.

Using the Components tab

To set the default prefix and start number for all the parts that components create, click Tools >
Options > Options... > Components. You define different prefixes and start numbers
according to the part’s relationship to other parts in the component. Separate the prefix and part
number using the \ character (for example, p\1).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 31
Getting Started
 Prefix

Part number

Defining materials
To define the materials for the parts that components create, click against the
Material field. Tekla Structures opens the Select Material dialog box. Click a material type,
then click the material to use for the part.

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 Using the Components tab
To set the default part material for the parts that components create, click Tools > Options >
Options... > Components tab, and use the Part material field. Tekla Structures uses this
default if you leave the Material field blank in the component dialog box when you apply the
component.

1.5 Defining bolts and welds

Use the Bolts or Welds tabs to define which bolts, assemblies, and welds to use in specific
components.

Topics Using the Bolts tab (p. 33)

Defining bolts (p. 35)
Creating holes (p. 35)
Number of bolts and spacing (p. 36)
Bolt group orientation (p. 36)
Bolt group pattern (p. 37)
Edge distance (p. 37)
Bolt position (p. 37)
Defining slotted holes (p. 39)
Deleting bolts (p. 40)
Defining bolt assemblies (p. 41)
Welds (p. 41)

Using the Bolts tab

This illustration shows the properties you can set on the Bolts tab of component dialog boxes:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 33
Getting Started
 Slotted hole dimensions

Slotted to create slotted hole in part

Check bolt components to include (bolt, washer, screw).

Shank length protruding from the nut

Bolt spacing - vertical

Number of bolts

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 Enter bolt order number of bolt to delete.

Edge distance

Bolt spacing (horizontal)

Number of bolts

Bolt group pattern

Horizontal

Vertical

Defining bolts
Use the following fields on the Bolts tab to specify the type of bolts to use in individual
components:

Dialog box
text Description
Bolt size Must be defined in the bolt assembly catalog. See also The
bolt and bolt assembly catalogs.
Bolt standard The bolt standard to use inside the component. Must be
defined in the bolt assembly catalog.
Tolerance Gap between bolt and hole.
Thread in mat Indicate if the thread can be inside bolted parts when using
bolts with a shaft. Has no effect if using full-threaded
bolts.
Site/Workshop Location where bolts should be attached.

Increasing bolt length

To allow for additional material thickness, increase the length of the bolt on the Bolts tab. For
example, you could use this for painted parts.
Enter extra bolt length

Tekla Structures uses this value in bolt length calculation. See Bolt length calculation.

Creating holes
To only create a hole, deselect all the components in the illustration on the Bolts tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 35
Getting Started
Number of bolts and spacing
Use the Bolts tab to specify the number of bolts and bolt spacing, both horizontally and
vertically.
Enter the number of bolts in the shorter field, and the spacing between bolts in the longer field,
as shown below. Use a space to separate bolt spacing values. Enter a value for each space
between bolts.

Example For example, if there are 3 bolts, enter 2 values.

Number of bolts

Bolt spacing

The settings above result in this bolt group layout:

Bolt group orientation

Some connections include the following options on the Bolts tab to orientate bolt groups:

Option Description
Square.

Staggered in the direction of the secondary part.

Sloped in the direction of the secondary part.

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
Bolt group pattern
For some components you can select different bolt group patterns. You have the following
options:

Option

Edge distance
Edge distance is the distance from the center of a bolt to the edge of the part. Enter top, bottom,
left, and right edge distances on the Bolts tab. A dimension line on the illustration shows each
dimension. See also Using the joints.def file (p. 46).

Edge distance dimension line

Enter edge distances here

Bolt position
In the list box on the Bolts tab, select an option to indicate how to measure dimensions for
vertical and horizontal bolt position.
Then enter the dimension in the fields indicated below. If you leave this field blank, Tekla
Structures uses a system default value.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 37
Getting Started
 Enter dimensions

Measure dimension from....

Vertical bolt position

Use these options to indicate how Tekla Structures measures vertical dimensions:

Option Dimension from Illustration

Top Upper edge of secondary part to
uppermost bolt.

Middle Centerline of bolts to centerline of

secondary part.

Bottom Lower edge of secondary part to

lowest bolt.

Horizontal bolt position

Use these options to indicate how Tekla Structures measures horizontal dimensions:

38 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 Option Dimension from Illustration
Left Left edge of secondary part to far
left bolt.

Middle Centerline of bolts.

Right Right edge of secondary part to far

right bolt.

Defining slotted holes

To define slotted holes in components:
1. Open the component properties dialog box and click on the Bolts tab. Different bolt
groups may appear on different tabs in different dialog boxes.
2. Set Hole type to Slotted.
3. Select which parts have slotted holes from the Slots in list box. Select No to create round
holes.
4. To shape slotted holes, enter the x or y dimensions of the hole. To produce a round hole,
enter zero (0) for both dimensions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 39
Getting Started
 Slotted hole length = x or y dimension + Bolt size + Tolerance

For some components you can specify which parts have slotted holes
using the Bolts tab. For example, Clip angle (141), Shear plate simple
(146).

You can also use the Bolt command to modify bolt groups after creating components. For more
information, see Holes.

Deleting bolts
To delete bolts from a bolt group:
1. Double click the component symbol to open the component dialog box.
2. Go to the Bolts tab.
3. Check Delete.
4. Enter the bolt number(s) of the bolt(s) to delete, separated by a space. Bolt numbers run
left to right and top down.
5. Click Modify to change the selected component.
6. Click OK to exit the component dialog box.

Example You start with this bolt group:

You enter the following bolt numbers:

The bolt group now looks like this:

40 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
Defining bolt assemblies
On the illustration on the Bolts tab, check the pieces to use in the bolt assembly (bolt, washers,
and nuts).

To change the bolt assemblies in the current component:

1. Click the component symbol to select it.
2. Check the pieces to use.
3. Check Effect in modify.
4. Click the Modify button.

Welds
To define the properties of the welds Tekla Structures uses in a component, click the Welds
button in the component properties dialog box. Tekla Structures displays the appropriate weld
dialog box.
The illustration identifies each weld using a number. For each weld, use row 1 to define the
arrow side of the weld, and row 2 for the other side.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 41
Getting Started
See also Welds

1.6 AutoConnection
Introduction Use AutoConnection to automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties
to selected parts. Use AutoConnection to have Tekla Structures automatically create similar
connections for similar framing conditions.

Topics Using AutoConnection (p. 42)

Using AutoConnection
Use AutoConnection to have Tekla Structures automatically create connections using a
predefined set of rules, or rule group.

Creating To create connections using AutoConnection:

connections
1. Pick the parts to connect.
2. Click Detailing > AutoConnection... to display the AutoConnection dialog box.
3. Select a rule group in the first list box on the Rule groups tab as shown below.

42 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 Rule group for AutoConnection

Rule group for AutoDefaults

4. Click the Create connections button.

When you use AutoConnection, Tekla Structures ignores the properties in the connection
dialog boxes and creates connections using the properties defined in the rule group. Tekla
Structures does not modify existing connections.
You can change the properties of connections you create using AutoConnection.

Additional Use the options on the Advanced tab to indicate which rule groups you want to use for each
options Framing condition (beam to beam web, beam to beam flange, etc.). You also have the option
not to apply a rule group, or to apply a specific connection.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 43
Getting Started
Example You can use a rule group for all framing types other than beam to column flange, and indicate a
particular connection to use for that framing type.

Options Use Connection selection to indicate your preferences for each framing condition. You have
the following options:

Option Result
None Tekla Structures does not create a connection.
AutoConnection Tekla Structures applies the connection defined in
the rule group you have indicated in the first list
box on the Rule groups tab.
A named connection Click Select to pick from a list of available
connections. Click a connection, then OK.
Tekla Structures creates the connection you specify
using the default properties. See Automatic and
default properties (p. 14).

Use Parameters selection to indicate which connection properties you want to use. The
options are:

Option Result
AutoDefaults Tekla Structures applies the properties of the rule
group you have indicated in the first list box on
Rule groups tab.
No AutoDefaults Tekla Structures applies the default connection
properties. See Automatic and default properties
(p. 14).

44 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
1.7 AutoDefaults
Introduction Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply connections. When you use AutoDefaults, Tekla
Structures automatically creates connections with predefined properties.
For example, you can use AutoDefaults to automatically adjust the thickness of each base plate
you create, according to the main part profile. If the main part profile changes, Tekla Structures
will also automatically adjust the thickness of the base plate.

Topics Using AutoConnection (p. 42)

Using AutoDefaults (p. 45)
How to use AutoDefaults effectively (p. 46)
Checking AutoDefaults properties (p. 46)
Checking AutoDefaults rules (p. 46)

Using AutoDefaults
With AutoDefaults you can have Tekla Structures apply connection properties using a
predefined set of rules. You can use AutoDefaults together with AutoConnection to define
connection properties, or separately to define the properties of a single connection.
To use AutoDefaults for a single connection:
1. Open the connection dialog box.
2. On the General tab, select a rule group (the rule group cannot be None).
3. On all the tabs, set the fields that you want AutoDefaults to override to Default by
selecting the options marked with the arrow symbol.
4. Click Apply to create the connection using AutoDefaults.

To quickly set all the fields in a dialog box to Default, load <Defaults>
in the connection dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 45
Getting Started
How to use AutoDefaults effectively
Use default values when you create a connection, then use AutoDefaults to modify the
properties.
If you manually modify connection properties after using AutoDefaults, Tekla Structures will
not automatically update the connection properties, even if AutoDefaults is active.
AutoDefaults does not change connection properties that have been modified. It only modifies
connection properties in fields containing the default properties.
For example, you have manually set a base plate thickness of 20 mm in the Base plate dialog
box of a connection. AutoDefaults is active and sets plate thickness according to the main part
profile. If you modify the main part profile, Tekla Structures does not update the base plate
thickness. It remains at 20 mm.

Checking AutoDefaults properties

To check the properties AutoDefaults has applied to a connection:
1. Double-click the connection symbol to open the connection dialog box.
2. In the list box in the upper left corner of the dialog box, select <AutoDefaults>.
3. Click Load. Tekla Structures shows the applied properties in the fields. You can also see
all the combined properties used for that connection.

Checking AutoDefaults rules

You can check which rules AutoDefaults has used for a particular connection.
1. Select the connection symbol and right-click.
2. Select Inquire.
Tekla Structures shows the rule group and rule sets that the connection passed. You can also see
all the properties files used for that connection.

1.8 Using the joints.def file

This section explains how to use the joints.def text file to set the default properties for
different connection types. Not all connections use joints.def.

If you are new to using joints.def, we suggest you read each of the
topics in this section thoroughly before making any changes.

Topics About joints.def (p. 47)

Defining general defaults (p. 48)
Defining bolt diameter and number of rows (p. 50)
Defining other bolt and part properties (p. 51)
How Tekla Structures uses joints.def (p. 57)
Connections that use joints.def (p. 48)

46 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
About joints.def
Changing the joints.def file changes the default values for different connection types. You
can open the joints.def file in any standard text editor.

Tekla Structures only uses the values in joints.def for blank fields.
AutoDefaults and manual entries override joints.def.

If you use joints.def, you can still use some system default properties. To force Tekla
Structures to use the system default for a particular property, give it the value -2147483648 in
joints.def.
By default, Tekla Structures includes the joints.def file in the system folder.
Tekla Structures searches for joints.def in the standard search order.

How joints.def works

For each connection type, Tekla Structures follows these steps to assign bolt and part
properties.
1. Tekla Structures determines bolt diameter and number of bolts according to the following
criteria:

Connection type According to

Clip angle Secondary beam height
Shear plate Secondary beam height
End plate Secondary beam height
Gusset Length of angle profile
Diagonal Profile height

2. Tekla Structures uses bolt diameter to assign other bolt and part properties.

How to read joints.def

Lines beginning with // are comment lines. They are there to help you read the file, Tekla
Structures does not use the information in comment lines.
The first few lines contain some general settings:
Set the following line to the unit of measure appropriate to the version you are using (for
example, inches in the Imperial version).

To have Tekla Structures use the default values in joints.def, set the following line to 1.
Set it to 0 to have Tekla Structures use the system defaults.

Properties for each connection type appear in individual sections, as shown below. Each section
begins with a header row containing the column labels. Do not add columns to the file.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 47
Getting Started
 Entering values
When you edit joints.def:
• Enter absolute values or names
• Do not use feet and inch symbols
• Ensure that profiles exist in the profile catalog
• Ensure bolts exist in the bolt catalog.

Connections that use joints.def

Only the following connections use joints.def

Connections Connections
Two sided angle cleat (25) Boomerang bracing cross (60)
Beam with stiffener (129) Corner bolted gusset (57)
Column with shear plate (131) Boomerang tube diagonal (59)
Bolted moment connection (134) Corner tube gusset (56)
Clip angle (141) Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58)
Two sided end plate (142) Corner wrapped gusset (63)
Two sided clip angle (143) Bolted gusset (11)
End plate (144) Bracing cross (19)
Shear plate simple (146) Tube gusset (20)
Welded to top flange (147) Tube crossing (22)
Welded to top flange S (149) Gusset wrapped cross (62)
Moment connection (181) Wrapped cross (61)
Column with stiffeners W (182) Welded gusset (10)
Full depth (184)
Full depth S (185)
Column with stiffeners (186)
Column with stiffeners S (187)
Column with stiffeners (188)
Bent plate (190)
Shear plate tube column (189)

Defining general defaults

If Tekla Structures cannot find a property for a connection in the connection-specific sections
of joints.def, it looks for the default property in the General section.

Example In clip angles, Tekla Structures uses the default bolt diameter in the General section if the
secondary beam height is larger than the highest value in the Clip angle section of
joints.def.
The properties in the General section of joints.def are:

48 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
Properties Description
boltdia Bolt diameter.
pitch Distance from the center of one bolt to the center of
the next.
clipweld Weld size.
angle-cc-inc Tekla Structures adds bolt to bolt distance and web
thickness, then rounds the result up by this value.
Complies with US AISC standard.
lprofgapinc Tekla Structures rounds the angle profile gap up by
this value. Complies with US AISC standard.
lsize Size of the angle profile.
copedepth Determines notch size.
copelength Determines notch size.
boltedge Edge distance.
webplatelen Haunch plate height (h).
webplatewid Haunch plate width (b).
beamedge Distance from the upper edge of the angle profile to
the top of the secondary beam.
knifeclr No longer used.
clipedge Edge distance for bolts (clip angles only).
gap No longer used.
shearplatethk Shear plate thickness.
endplatethk End plate thickness.
shearweld Size of weld.
cliplsize Size of angle profile (clip angles only).
flangecutclear Flange cut clearance.
slotsize Size of slotted hole.
clipslots Which part gets slotted holes:
1 for beam
2 for angle profiles
3 for both
Refers to the Slots in list box options on the Bolts
tab. See individual connection help for details.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 49
Getting Started
 Properties Description
clipattach How the clip angle is attached to the secondary and
main parts:
1 is Both bolted
2 is Main bolted / Secondary welded
3 is Main not welded
4 is Main welded / Secondary bolted
5 is Both welded
6 is Main not bolted
7 is Secondary not welded
8 is Secondary not bolted
9 is Both bolted / welded
Refers to the attachment type list box options on the
Bolts tab. See individual connection help for details.
copedepthinc Tekla Structures rounds cope depth up using this
value.
copelengthinc Tekla Structures rounds cope length using this value.

Defining bolt diameter and number of rows

Before you start, read How joints.def works (p. 47). Use the rows beginning with
BOLTHEIGHT in each connection-specific section of joints.def to define the default bolt
diameter and default number of bolt rows for the following connection types:
• Clip angle, shear plate, and end plate connections (p. 50)
• Gusset connections (p. 50)
• Diagonal connections (p. 51)

Clip angle, shear plate, and end plate connections

Tekla Structures calculates the default bolt diameter and number of rows vertically according to
the height of the secondary beam. You can enter the following properties:

Property Description
name Use the name BOLTHEIGHT
part Use the part name ANGLECLIP
sec.beam.height Maximum height of secondary beam for a certain
number of bolts
diameter Bolt diameter. Must exist in the bolt catalog.
number_of_bolts Number of bolts vertically

Gusset connections
Tekla Structures calculates the default bolt diameter and number of bolt rows horizontally
according to the length of the angle profile. You can enter the following properties:

50 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 Property Description
name Use the name BOLTHEIGHT
part Use the part name GUSSET
lproflength Length of angle profile
or
angleproflength
diameter Bolt diameter. Must exist in bolt catalog
number_of_bolts Number of bolts horizontally

Diagonal connections
Tekla Structures calculates the default bolt diameter and number of bolt rows horizontally
according to the profile height. You can enter the following properties:

Property Description
name Use the name BOLTHEIGHT
part Use the part name DIAGONAL
conn.pl.height Profile height
or
profileheight
diameter Bolt diameter. Must exist in bolt catalog.
number_of_bolts Number of bolts horizontally

Defining other bolt and part properties

Before you start, read How joints.def works (p. 47). Once Tekla Structures has used
joints.def to calculate bolt diameter, it uses the result to assign other properties to bolts
and parts, according to connection type.

Example Enter the default properties for bolts and parts in clip angle connections in the rows beginning
ANGLECLBOLTPART in the CLIP ANGLE section of joints.def.

Properties lookup The table below lists the properties you assign for bolts and parts for each connection type.
table
Gusset and diagonal connections have additional properties. See Gusset connection
properties (p. 52) and Diagonal connection properties (p. 55).

Key to lookup
table
Connection type Full name
C Clip angle
S Shear plate
E End plate
G Gusset
D Diagonal

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 51
Getting Started
 Connection Type

Property Description C S E G D
name Identifies the connection * * * * *
type.
Example GUSSETBOLTPART
for gusset connections.
bolt diameter Bolt diameter. Must exist in * * * * *
the bolt catalog.
See also Profile type-
dependent bolt dimensions
(p. 56)
shear plate Thickness of shear plate *
thickness
end plate Thickness of end plate *
thickness
gusset thickness Thickness of the gusset *
conn. plate Thickness of the connection *
thickness plate
angle profile Name of the angle profile to * * *
use:
or L profile
• Must exist in the profile
catalog
• Enter the exact name
• Example:
L100*100*10
number Number of bolts in each row: * * * * *
• vertically
• horizontally
pitch Distance between bolts from * * * * *
the center of each bolt. For
vertical and horizontal bolts
edge distance Distance from the center of a * * * *
bolt to the edge of the part.
For vertical and horizontal
bolts
vert.bolt Position of the first vertical * * *
firsthole row of bolts

Gusset connection properties

Enter these additional default properties in the row beginning GUSSETDEFDIM. Not all gusset
connections use all these properties:

52 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 Affects
plate
Option Description shape
name GUSSETDEFDIM
boltdia_def Bolt diameter for all bolt groups. Leave the Bolt
size field blank in the dialog box to have Tekla
Structures use the value in joints.def.
tol_prim See illustration.
tol_sec See illustration.
dist_diag_prim Clearance between the first secondary part
selected and the main part.
dist_diag_sec Perpendicular distance from last secondary part
selected to the nearest secondary.
angle_first_corner See illustration. Yes
angle_sec_corner See illustration. Yes
dist_between_diag Clearance between braces.
first_bolt_from_lin Bolt edge distance for the bolt groups on the
e Gusset tab.
corner_dx See illustration.
corner_dy See illustration.
movey On the Gusset tab:

movey

movez On the Gusset tab:

movez

dist1 The length of the edge of the gusset plate that is Yes
perpendicular to the lowest brace.
dist2 The length of the edges of the gusset plate Yes
perpendicular to the braces.
dist3 The length of the edge of the gusset plate Yes
perpendicular to the uppermost brace.
tol_lprof See illustration.
tol_stiffener Tolerance of stiffener.
chamfer_dx Dimensions of stiffener chamfer on the Gusset
tab:
chamfer_dy
chamfer_corner_dx chamfer_corner_dx
chamfer_corner_dy
chamfer-corner_dy

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 53
Getting Started
 Affects
plate
Option Description shape
side_length
diafit_length Fit length in Bracing cross (19) connection.
Leave this field empty on the Parameters tab to
have Tekla Structures use the value in
joints.def.

The illustration below shows the properties on the Picture tab of the Boomerang wrapped
diagonal (58) connection dialog box.

tol_lprof

corner_dy

corner_dx

dist_diag_sec

tol_sec

angle_sec_corner

54 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 dist3

dist_between_diag

dist2

dist1

dist_diag_prim

tol_prim

Diagonal connection properties

Enter these additional default properties for bolts and parts in the rows beginning
DIAGDEFDIM. Not all diagonal connections use all these properties:

Property Description
name DIAGDEFDIM
boltdia_def Bolt diameter for all bolt groups. Leave the Bolt
size field blank in the dialog box to have Tekla
Structures use the value in joints.def.
dist_gus_diag Gap between the gusset plate and the brace. If
tube profiles are closed with end plates, the gap
between the gusset plate and the end plate.
dist_in Depth of the cut in the brace. Enter a negative
value to prevent the connection plate from being
inside the tube brace.
dist_dv Distance from the edge of the brace to the edge of
the connection plate. This dimension changes the
width of the connection plate.
sec_cut_tol On the Brace conn tab:
slot_length_tol

sec_cut_tol

slot_length_tol
tube_cut_tol On the Brace conn tab:

tube_cut_tol

conn_cut_dx On the Brace conn tab:

conn_cut_dy
conn_cut_dy

conn_cut_dx

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 55
Getting Started
 Property Description
round_plate_tol On the Brace conn tab:

end_plate_thk

flanges_cut_angle On the Brace conn tab:

dist_flanges_cut flanges_cut_angle
dist_skew_cut

dist_flanges_cut

dist_skew_cut
end_plate_thk End plate field t in the Tube diag tab.

This illustration shows the properties that appear on the Picture tab of the Tube crossing (22)
connection:

dist_dv

dist_in

dist_gus_diag

Profile type-dependent bolt dimensions

For some connections, such as Clip angle (141) and Two sided clip angle (143), Tekla
Structures calculates the bolt size according to the profile size.
In this type of connections, Tekla Structures takes the bolt size from the PROFILE TYPE-
DEPENDENT BOLT DIMENSIONS section of joints.def file if you leave the corresponding
fields blank on the Bolts tab:

56 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 The options are:

Option Description
width Width of the profile
one bolt firsthole For single bolts, distance from the heel of the
profile angle to the first hole.
two bolts firsthole For two bolts, distance from the heel of the
profile angle to the first hole.
pitch Distance between bolts from the center of
each bolt. For vertical and horizontal bolts.

Example To find the bolt dimensions to be used with an L6X6X1/2 profile in a clip angle connection:
1. Tekla Structures searches the rows beginning PROFILEBOLTDIM for L6X6X1/2 in the
PROFILE TYPE-DEPENDENT BOLT DIMENSIONS section of joints.def.
2. If there is no match, Tekla Structures searches the rows beginning ANGLECLBOLTPART in
the CLIP ANGLE section of joints.def.

How Tekla Structures uses joints.def

This example explains how Tekla Structures calculates bolt diameter and other properties using
joints.def. We are using a Bolted gusset (11) connection. The height of the diagonal
profile is 10".
• Tekla Structures calculates bolt size and number of bolts according to profile height. It
searches the BOLTHEIGHT rows for a profile height of 10".
• The profile height is greater than 8.0 but less than 12.0, so Tekla Structures uses the row
with the profile height 8.0. This sets the bolt diameter to 0.75.

• Tekla Structures assigns the bolt and part properties according to the bolt diameter. It
searches the DIAGBOLTPART rows for a bolt diameter of 0.75.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 57
Getting Started
Result

Property Value
Bolt diameter 0.75
Number of bolts horizontally 2
Edge distance horizontally 1.5
Edge distance vertically 1.5
Distance between bolts horizontally 2.5
Distance between bolts vertically system default

Tekla Structures does not use the connection plate thickness or angle profile properties in this
connection.

1.9 Using Excel in connection design

You can link system components and Excel spreadsheets, so when a component is applied or
modified, an associated Excel spreadsheet application can be run. The configuration
information is passed from the component to the spreadsheet, calculation run within the
spreadsheet and component properties passed back to the connection.

You can use Excel in connection design for all steel components that
have the Design tab in their properties dialog box.

Tekla Structures includes sample spreadsheet for connection design and a template spreadsheet
you should use to create your own spreadsheet applications to use with Tekla Structures
components.
Before you start:
• Create the connections and parts.
• Create the Excel spreadsheet for connection type, or use a predefined file. See more in
Setting up Excel files (p. 59).
To use the Excel spreadsheet for connection design:
1. Double-click the connection to open the connection properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Design (or Design type) tab and select Excel in the External design list box.
3. Click Modify.
4. The connection properties are transferred from Tekla Structures to a connection type
specific Excel spreadsheet, where the properties are calculated.
5. The calculated properties are saved to an output file.
6. The modified properties are transferred back to Tekla Structures and the connection is
modified according to the changes.

Topics Setting up Excel files (p. 59)

Sample implementation (p. 59)
Indicating component status (p. 62)

58 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
Setting up Excel files
The following list describes what kind of files are needed for performing connection design
with Excel:
• Visual Basic script file linking Tekla Structures with external software.
• Excel spreadsheet containing calculations.
• Component type specific spreadsheet, which contains predefined calculations.
• When you run the connection design, the connection properties and information of the
main and secondary parts are transferred to the Input and Component sheets of the
spreadsheet.
• Connection specific result file, which displays the modified connection properties is
stored to model folder.
• This file is created automatically from the Calculation sheet of the spreadsheet.
• The file is updated each time you modify the connection.
• Calculation results can be stored as Excel spreadsheet, HTML or PDF format,
depending on how calculation spreadsheet is configured.

File names and Excel.vb file (located in the ..\Tekla

locations Structures\<version>\environments\common\exceldesign folder) defines
the Excel spreadsheet file names and the locations. Excel searches for the spreadsheet in the
following order and with following name:
1. File named component_ + number or name + .xls, from the current model
folder: ..\<model>\exceldesign
For example, ..\test_model\exceldesign\component_144.xls
2. File name and path defined with advanced option
XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH:
XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH
(=%XS_DIR%\environments\common\exceldesign\) + "component_"
+ number + ".xls"
By default, the result file is stored in the model folder and named with component ID. For
example, component_9502_res.xls.

Sample implementation
Below is descibed the contents of an Excel spreadsheet which is used for End plate (144)
connection:
When user clicks Modify in the End plate (144) properties dialog box, Excel.vb file calls
Excel spreadsheet named component_144.xls.

Contents The sample spreadsheet includes the following sheets:

Inputs (user inputs on connection dialog).
• Tekla Structures transfers the component properties from the component properties dialog
box to this sheet.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 59
Getting Started
 Component
• Tekla Structures transfers the component geometry and information on the main and
secondary parts (for example, part profiles) into this sheet. The component attributes in the
spreadsheet are the same as in the corresponding .inp file. See more about .inp files in
Input files.
• This sheet includes calculations (the calculations can be as Visual Basic macros in the
sheet).

60 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
Calculation
• Summary of calculation is collected to the Calculation sheet. This page or full Excel
spreadsheet can be stored as a report of the calculation.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 61
Getting Started
 Outputs
• Excel adds the modified values to the Output sheet. These values are tranferred back to the
connection and connection in the model is modified accordingly.

Indicating component status

When you use Excel in connection design, you can have Tekla Structures use different colored
component symbols to indicate the status of a component in the model.
To do this, include the error attribute on the Output page of the Excel spreadsheet for the
component. The possible values are:

62 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
Value Color Status
1 Green Bolt edge distances are sufficient.
Passes the connection design check using the UK
and US design codes embedded in the system.
2 Yellow Bolt edge distances are insufficient according to
the value in Tools > Options > Options... >
Components.
3 Red Tekla Structures cannot calculate the component
properties. Possible reasons include:
• Incorrect connection direction
• Incorrect workplane
• Inappropriate connection selected
• The connection design check was carried
out using the embedded UK and US design
codes and the connection cannot support the
loading defined by the user.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 63
Getting Started
64 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Getting Started
 2 Custom Components

Introduction Tekla Structures contains a set of tools for defining intelligent connections, parts, seams, and
details, called custom components. You can create your own components, similar to Tekla
Structures system components. Tekla Structures creates a dialog box for the custom
component, which you can easily customize, if required.
You can then use custom components in the same way as any Tekla Structures system
component.

You can also edit custom components to create parametric custom components that
automatically adjust to changes in the model.

Audience This chapter is aimed at people who know how to use Tekla Structures components.

Contents This chapter includes the following topics, which are the steps you follow to create custom
components:
• Defining custom components (p. 66)
• Editing custom components (p. 73)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 65
Custom Components
 • Defining variables (p. 78)
• Functions to use in formulas (p. 87)
• Defining custom component properties (p. 95)
• Managing and using custom components (p. 105)
• Custom components reference (p. 116)

2.1 Defining custom components

Introduction You can build custom components either by exploding and modifying an existing component,
or by creating the component objects individually.
You then define a custom component by selecting the objects to include in the custom
component, and specifying the information the user needs to input, for example, main part,
secondary parts, or points they need to pick. You can now apply the custom component in a
similar location in the model to where it was originally created.

To create a parametric custom component, you need to do some more

editing. For more information, see Editing custom components (p. 73).

Go to Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component to define the properties of a new
custom component.
To browse a list of custom components,
1. Press Ctrl + F to open the Component catalog.
2. Select Search results > Custom.

Topics Exploding components (p. 66)

Defining a custom component (p. 66)
Custom component types (p. 70)
Custom component basic properties (p. 72)

Exploding components
Explode Component is a very useful command to use when defining custom components. It
ungroups the objects in an existing component, you can then remove and modify parts and
other objects in the component.
To explode a component:
1. Click Detailing > Component > Explode component.
2. Select the component to explode.
3. Tekla Structures ungroups the objects in the component.

Defining a custom component

You can define and save custom components in the component library.
Before you can define a custom component, you need to create a sample component in the
model containing all the necessary component objects, such as parts, fittings, bolts, and so on.

66 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 To quickly create a custom component, explode a similar existing
component, then change it to suit your needs. See Exploding
components (p. 66).

Use the Custom Component Wizard on the Detailing menu to define the properties of a new
custom component. See the following example.

Follow the steps in the custom component wizard. Some steps are
different for different types of custom component.

Example In the following example we will create a custom component based on an existing end plate
component that we have exploded.

To explode a component, select the component, right-click and select

Explode Component from the pop-up menu.

1. Click Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... to open the Custom
Component Wizard dialog box.

2. On the Type/Notes tab, set Type to Connection. Enter a Name for the custom component.
3. On the Position and Advanced tabs, set the Position type and other properties for the
custom component. For more information on other properties, see
Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... (p. 117).
4. Click Next.
5. Select the objects to use in the custom component and click Next.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 67
Custom Components
 You can use area select to select the objects to include. Tekla Structures
ignores the main part, secondary parts, grids and component symbols
when you are selecting objects to include in the custom component.

6. Select the main part and click Next.

68 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
7. Select the secondary part(s). To select several secondary part(s), hold down the Shift key
while you select the parts. The maximum number of secondary parts in a custom
component is 30.

Pay attention to the order in which you select secondary parts. The
custom component will use the same selection order when you use it in a
model.

8. Click Finish.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 69
Custom Components
 9. Tekla Structures displays a component symbol for the new component.
You have now defined a simple custom component, which you can use in similar locations to
where it was originally created. This component is not parametric and Tekla Structures does not
adjust dimensions to suit any changes in the model. To create a parametric custom component,
see Editing custom components (p. 73).

See also Custom component basic properties (p. 72)

Custom component types (p. 70)

Custom component types

Custom component types are:

70 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
Type Description Example
Connectio Creates connection
n objects and
connects secondary
part(s) to a main
part.
Component symbol
is green.

Detail Creates detail

objects and
connects them to a
main part at a
picked location.
Component symbol
is green.

Seam Creates seam

objects and
connects parts
along a line picked
with two points.
Component symbol
is green.

Part Creates a group of

objects which may
contain connections
and details.
Gets no symbol,
has same position
properties as
beams.

Main part

Secondary part

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 71
Custom Components
Custom component basic properties
Tekla Structures automatically creates each custom component with a set of basic properties,
which we describe in this section. To view the properties of a custom component:
1. Press Ctrl + F to open the Component catalog.
2. In the Search result listbox, select Custom. A list of custom components appears in the
lower pane.
3. Double-click a custom component on the list to open its properties dialog box.

Basic properties Custom connections, seams, and details have the following basic properties:
of custom
connections,
seams, and
details Field Description More information
Up direction Rotates the component. Up direction (p. 13)
Position in relation to The creation point of the General tab (p. 15)
secondary part component relative to the main part.
Available for details by default.
To use this property in connections
and seams, select the Allow
multiple instances of connection
between same parts checkbox on
the Advanced tab when you create
the component.
Class The class of the parts that the About parts
custom component creates.
Connection code Identifies the connection. Tekla Mark elements
Structures can display this
connection code in connection
marks in drawings.
AutoDefaults rule The rule group used for setting the Using AutoDefaults (p.
group connection properties. 45)
AutoConnection rule The rule group Tekla Structures uses Using AutoConnection
group to select the connection. (p. 42)

Basic properties Custom parts have the following basic properties:

of custom parts

Field Description More information

On plane Changes part location on work Position on the work
plane. plane
Rotation Rotates part in steps of 90 degrees. Rotation

72 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 Field Description More information
At depth Changes part location perpendicular Position depth
to work plane.
Show third handle Sets the third handle of a nested Part handles
custom part to be visible in the
desired direction.
You can bind the third handle in the
desired direction and thus force the
part to follow the rotation of another
part. You have the following
options:
• Above: the handle is shown
above the first handle in custom
part local coordinate system.
• On the left: the handle is shown
on the left-hand side of the first
handle in custom part local
coordinate system.
• No: the third handle is not
shown.

See also Defining a custom component (p. 66)

Using a custom component (p. 111)
Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... (p. 117)

Custom components in a new Tekla Structures version

When you move to a new version of Tekla Structures, always check that custom components
created in older versions work correctly in the new version.
When you open custom components made with an older version of Tekla Structures in the
Custom component editor, and the new version contains improvements requiring update, Tekla
Structures asks whether you want to update the component. If you do not update the
component, it works in the same manner as in the version where it was originally made, but you
do not gain the benefits of the improvements.
If you choose to update the component, you need to check and sometimes even recreate
dimensions depending on the improvements. When you delete a dimension and create a new
one (even with the same name), also the equations containing the dimension need to be edited,
because the dependency created by the equation is lost when a dimension is deleted. You can
recreate the dimensions and edit the equations easily in the Custom component editor.

2.2 Editing custom components

Introduction To make a simple custom component parametric, so that it adapts to changes in the model, you
must edit it in the Custom component editor. Here you can build dependencies between
component objects and model objects. For example, you could specify that the size of a
stiffener depends on the size of the beam. So, if you change the size of the beam, the size of the
stiffener also changes. You can also add distance variables, for example to specify the gap
between a plate and a beam.

Topics Custom component editor (p. 74)

Plane types (p. 125)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 73
Custom Components
 Construction plane (p. 126)

Custom component editor

Use the custom component editor to modify custom components and create intelligent,
parametric custom components.
First, create a custom component in the model.

Opening the To open the custom component editor:

editor
1. Click Detailing > Component > Edit Custom Component.
2. Select the custom component. The Custom component editor opens. It shows the
Custom component editor toolbar, the Custom component browser and four views of
the custom component.

Custom parts do not have a component symbol. To be able to select

custom parts, make sure the Select components switch is active.

Custom The toolbar contains the following icons and list boxes:
component
toolbar

Icon/ List box Description

Creates a distance.

Creates a reference distance.

Creates distances automatically.

Creates a construction plane.

Creates a construction line.

Plane types Displays plane types you can use when defining
distance variables.
For more information, see Plane types (p. 125).
Position types Define the position (or origin) of the custom
component, relative to the main part.
For more information, see Position type (p. 119).
Allows you to edit the type or the position of a custom
component or add notes after you have created the
component.
Shows all created variables.

Displays Custom component browser.

74 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 Icon/ List box Description
Saves the custom component with another name.

Saves and updates the existing component(s) in the

model.

Closes the editor.

For more information on these tools, see Custom components reference (p. 116).

Editing You can add and edit many custom component properties:
properties

Editing task More information

Create fields for material grade, Creating parameter variables
profile, bolt size, and other (p. 85)
properties that will be visible in
the custom component dialog box.
Define part dimensions, spacings, Creating distance variables (p.
gaps, etc. that will be visible in 79)
the custom component dialog box.
Bind component objects to model Automatic distances (p. 130)
objects so that component objects Creating distance variables (p.
adjust for new beam size or
79)
profile.
Create formulas to calculate Creating parameters that use
values, for example for formulae (p. 86)
calculating bolt edge distance
using bolt size.

Library Use the custom component editor to modify custom component. You can open a custom
component vs. component in the editor even if you have already used it in a model.
model
component When you have edited the custom component, you can choose to apply the changes to all
copies of the custom component, or to save the component with a new name.
• To apply your changes to the library and to all copies of the custom component in the
model, use the Copy component to library command.
• To save the edited custom component with a new name, use the Copy component to
library with new name command and enter a new name for the custom component.Tekla
Structures does not apply the changes to the other copies of the custom component in the
model.

Closing the editor To close the custom component editor:

1. Click the Close icon .

2. Tekla Structures asks if you want to save the custom component with its original name.

If you click Yes, Tekla Structures will overwrite the copies of the custom
component in the library and the model.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 75
Custom Components
Creating When you modify a custom component, Tekla Structures automatically creates a backup file of
automatic backup the custom component. The backup files have the extension .inp_bak, and they are located
files
in the model folder. Tekla Structures displays a notification when the backup file is created.
See also Custom component browser (p. 76)

Custom component browser

The Custom component browser shows the contents of a custom component in a
hierarchical, tree-like structure. The Custom component browser works with Custom
component editor views. Click a part in the view and Tekla Structures highlights it in the
browser, or click a part in the browser to have Tekla Structures highlight it in the view.
The Custom component browser contains the following information about a custom
component:

Model objects, to which custom component is attached

The objects the custom component creates

You can create links between custom component variables and
component object properties

You can create links between custom component parameter variables and component object
properties. For example, variable "m" defines the material grade for all plates in your
component. It appears as "Material = m" in the Custom component browser (see above
illustration). "m" is also a field in the custom component dialog box. When a user enters a value
in the "m" field in the dialog box for plates, Tekla Structures saves the value to the part
properties in the model.

76 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
Popup menu You can also use the popup menu in the Custom component browser to copy names, values,
and references from main and secondary parts in the component. Then use them in the
Variables dialog box to define the properties of custom components.
For example, to report how many secondary parts to pick when applying a component, you can
use a variable called Number of secondaries. You can then use the variable in formulas,
and copy the name, value and reference to other custom components.

Copies just the value the object currently has

Copies the link to the property. Link is dynamic, so when the property
later changes the reference reflects the change

Using custom If you have created a custom part in to your model, you can access the object properties of the
part properties custom part when the custom part is used an input part. You can access the name, profile,
material and class of the input custom part, and use the properties of the input part in the
component objects. This is useful in cases where the material for a new part needs to be taken
from the inner or outer layer of an existing part.

See also Defining variables (p. 78)

Creating parameter variables (p. 85)
Creating parameters that use formulae (p. 86)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 77
Custom Components
2.3 Defining variables
Variables are the properties of a custom component. Some of them appear in the custom
component dialog box, others are hidden and are only used in calculations.
There are two types of variable:

Variable type Description See also

Distance Distance between two planes or Creating distance
between a point and a plane. variables (p. 79)
Binds parts together or works as Creating reference
a variable reference distance. distances (p. 81)
Parameter All other properties, including Creating parameter
name, material grade, bolt size, variables (p. 85)
etc. Also used in calculations.
Creating parameters
that use formulae (p.
86)

Viewing variables To see all distance and parameter variables in a component, in the custom component editor,

click the Display variables icon

The Variables dialog box appears:

• The Component parameters category lists all distances and parameters that belong to the
current custom component.
• The Model parameters category lists all distances and parameters in the current model.
When you select a distance variable from a list, Tekla Structures highlights it in the model.

78 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 To delete the selected distance or parameter, click Delete.
To add a new parameter variable, click Add.
For more information, see Display variables (p. 120).

Topics Creating distance variables (p. 79)

Creating reference distances (p. 81)
Using magnetic construction planes (p. 84)
Creating parameter variables (p. 85)
Creating parameters that use formulae (p. 86)

Creating distance variables

Use distance variables to bind handles, fittings, cuts, and so on, to planes so that the custom
component can adapt to different situations, such as different main profile shapes and sizes.
You can create a distance variable from point to plane or from plane to plane. These distances
can be visible or hidden. Use visible distances when you want the user to enter a distance value
in the custom component dialog box. To simply bind objects to planes, use hidden distances.
You can bind the corners of polygon plates also in directions other than the plane of the plate.
You can, for example, bind the corner of a contour plate in the z direction.

Use the automatic distances command to automatically create distances

for the handles of picked components:

For more information, see Automatic distances (p. 130).

How In this example we will create a distance variable that binds the upper edge of the end plate to
the upper flange of the secondary part. Whenever you create this custom component in the
model, the end plate will follow the upper flange, regardless of the profile or size the secondary
part.
Before you start, ensure that the part representation is set to rendered. Part surfaces and
available planes can be selected only in rendered views.
To create the distance variable:
1. Select the object from which to measure the distance. This object will follow the plane to
which you bind it. In this example, select the plate’s topmost reference point (magenta or
yellow)

2. Click the Create distance icon or right-click the reference point and select Bind to
Plane from the pop-up menu.
3. Move the mouse cursor over a view to see the available planes.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 79
Custom Components
 Highlighted boundary plane

You can change plane types before selecting the plane

You can also use the Hide Part command if the plane is not accessible.

4. To create the distance, click when the plane you want to use is highlighted. Tekla
Structures draws a distance symbol in the views of the custom component editor. Tekla
Structures displays a distance symbol in the custom component editor views. You can bind
one object to a maximum of three planes.

Distance object

5. To end the command, right-click and select Interrupt.

6. Double-click the distance object. The Distance properties dialog box appears.

80 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 7. Enter a descriptive Name for the distance.

To test the distance variable, enter different values and click Modify to
see the changes in the model.

8. Click Cancel.
9. To hide or show the distance variable in the dialog box and to set the other properties, click

to open the Variables dialog box. For more information, see Display variables (p.
120).

Limitations You cannot pick points in secondary or main parts.

You cannot change an existing distance binding. You must delete the distance and then rebind
it.

To be able to select distances, make sure the Select distances switch is

active.

See also Create distance (p. 128)

Creating reference distances

Use reference distances to measure the distance between two points or a point and a plane. You
can then use the reference distance in calculations, for example, to determine the spacing of
rungs on a ladder.
A reference distance changes as you move the objects it refers to. Tekla Structures displays
reference distances in orange.
You cannot move objects by changing their reference distances.

To be able to select reference distances, make sure the Select distances

switch is active.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 81
Custom Components
Example In this example we will define several variables: distances, reference distances, and parameters,
and use them in a custom component that creates a ladder with rungs spaced at set intervals, for
any length of ladder. Here is how the variables appear in the Variables dialog box:

1. Create a ladder frame with one rung 285 mm from the bottom of the frame.
2. To make the ladder a custom component, select Detailing > Define custom component...
and follow the steps in the Custom component wizard.
3. Right-click the ladder and select Edit custom component... from the popup menu.
4. In the Custom component editor, use the Array of objects (29) component to create the
rest of the rungs.
Use the Create distance tool to bind the bottom rung to the bottom of the ladder frame
(D1 and D2 in the in the Variables dialog box).
See Create distance (p. 128) for step-by-step instructions.

82 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
5. Use the Create reference distance tool to create a reference distance from a handle on the
bottom rung to the plane at the top of the ladder.
• Select a rung handle
• On the Custom component editor toolbar, click the Create reference distance icon

• Bind the handle to the horizontal plane at the top of the ladder frame.
This distance appears as D3 in the Variables dialog box.
6. Go to the Variables dialog box.
7. Add a parameter (P1) to define rung spacing. Give it the value 250.
8. Add another parameter (P2) to define the distance from the bottom of the ladder to the first
rung. Give it the value 285.
9. Give the distances D1 and D2 the formula =P2. This forces both distances to be the value
defined by P2. 285 in this case.
10. Add a new parameter (P3) to define the number of rungs. Give it the formula =(D3-P2)/P1.
11. We want the number of rungs to be an integer, so add a new parameter (P4) and give it the
formula =ceil (15.52).This rounds P3 up to the nearest integer.
12. Add a new parameter (P5) to calculate the distance between the rungs. Give it the formula
=(D3-P2)/P4.
This formula subtracts the distance from the bottom of the ladder to the bottom rung from
the reference distance (D3) and divides the result by the number of rungs (P4).
13. Go to the Custom component browser and link the following properties of the Array of
objects (29) component to parameters P4 and P5, as shown below:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 83
Custom Components
 When you use this custom component to create a ladder in a model, Tekla Structures
automatically calculates the correct spacing for the rungs.

See also Create reference distance (p. 129)

Defining custom components (p. 66)

Using magnetic construction planes

You can bind several objects at one time using magnetic construction planes. The objects
directly on a magnetic plane will move with the plane. So you only need to create a distance
variable for the plane and not for each object separately.
As you can see from the example below, it is much easier and faster to use magnetic user planes
than to bind handles with individual distance variables.

Example Different methods of binding chamfers to the inner face of a flange:

84 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 Option 1: Control the stiffeners by using 4 magnetic construction planes
- one in each direction. Then you only bind each magnetic plane with one
distance variable
Option 2: Bind each chamfer separately - a total of 32 bindings

For more information on magnetic construction planes, see Construction plane (p. 126).

By default, the handles of contour plates are not visible. To show them,
set the advanced option XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES to
HANDLES.

Creating parameter variables

You can use parameter variables to set basic properties for objects that custom component
creates, for example, name, material, profile, position number, etc.

Example In this example we create a parameter variable "Weldsize" that sets all welds in a custom
component to a given size:

1. On the Custom component editor toolbar, click to open the Variables dialog box.
2. Click the Add button.
3. Enter following information:
• Name = Weldsize
• Formula =
• Value = 0.0
• Variable type = parameter
• Value type = length
• Visibility = Show (this makes Weldsize visible in the dialog box)
• Label in dialog box = WeldSize
4. Click OK button to close the dialog box.
5. In the Custom component browser, click Component objects > Weld > General
properties and right-click Size above line and select Add equation. Type after the equal
sign "Weldsize". Repeat this step for all welds.

6. Click Save.
7. Click Close icon to exit the Custom component editor.
Your custom component dialog box should now contain the field WeldSize. When anyone
creates the component, all welds are of the size you enter in the WeldSize field.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 85
Custom Components
Creating parameters that use formulae
This example shows how to create a hidden parameter variable that includes a formula to set
weld size to half the thickness of the secondary part flange. This variable will not be visible in
the custom component dialog box. When you create the component, Tekla Structures uses the
thickness of the secondary part flange to calculate the size of the weld(s).
1. In the Custom component browser, click Input objects > Secondary parts > Part >
Profile properties and right-click Flange thickness 1 and then select Copy reference.
Tekla Structures copies the reference to secondary part flange thickness to the Windows
Clipboard.

2. In the Custom component editor toolbar, click to open the Variables dialog box.
3. Click Add button.
4. Set Variable name to w.
5. Click the Formula field, type =, then right-click and select Paste. Tekla Structures pastes
the reference to flange thickness from the Clipboard. Now enter *0.5. Formula should now
read:
=fP(Flange thickness 1.1525)*0.5.

86 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 6. Set other values:
• Variable type = Parameter
• Value type =Length
• Visibility = Hide
7. In the Custom component browser, click Component Objects > Weld > General
properties and right-click Size above line and select Add equation. Type in after the
equal sign "w".
8. Click OK button to close the dialog box.

2.4 Functions to use in formulas

This section lists all the functions you can use in formulas in custom components. Formulas
always begin with the equals character (=). You can use the following functions in formulas:
• Reference function (p. 88)
• Mathematical functions (p. 89)
• Statistical functions (p. 90)
• Data type conversions (p. 91)
• String operations (p. 91)
• Trigonometric functions (p. 93)
• Framing condition functions (p. 93)

Arithmetic operators
You can use the following arithmetic operators:

Operator Description Notes

+ addition Use also to create strings of
parameters.
- subtraction
* multiplication Multiplication is faster than division,
so it is faster to use
=D1*0.5
rather than
=D1/2.
/ division

Logical statement
You can use if-then-else statements to test a condition and set the value according to the result:

=if (D1>200) then 20 else 10 endif

You can also use the operators && (the logical AND operator) and || (the logical OR operator)
inside the if statement.
• && - both conditions must be true

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 87
Custom Components
 • || only one condition must be true
For example to use a value 6:
• =if (D1==200 && D2<40) then 6 else 0 endif
D1 must be 200 and D2 must be less than 40.
• =if (D1==200 || D2<40) then 6 else 0 endif
D1 must equal 200, or D2 must be less than 40.

Reference function
A reference function refers to the property of another object, such as the plate thickness of a
secondary part. Tekla Structures refers to the object on the system level, so if the object
property changes, so does the reference function value.

fP(propertyname, ObjectId)
To ensure the function includes the correct parameters, cut and paste it from the Custom
component browser:
1. Right-click the property in the Custom component browser and select Copy reference.
2. Right-click the Formula cell in the Variables dialog box and select Paste.
Note that template attribute and user-defined attribute names must be written inside double
quotation marks:

Name Description Example

fTpl("template Returns the value of fTpl("WEIGHT",6290)
attribute", object template attribute with returns the weight of
ID) given object ID.
object, whose ID is 6290.
For a list of available
template attributes, see
Template Attributes
Reference Guide.
fP("user-defined Returns the value of user- fP("comment", 741)
attribute", object defined attribute with
returns the user-defined
ID) given object ID.
attribute comment of
object, whose ID is 741.

Mathematical functions
The mathematical functions are:

Name Description Example

fabs(parameter) Returns the absolute fabs(D1) returns 15
value of the specified
if D1 = -15
parameter.
exp(power) Returns e raised to the exp(D1) returns 7.39
specified power.
if D1=2
ln(parameter) Natural logarithm of the ln(P2) returns 2.71
specified parameter (base
if P2=15
number neper).

88 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 Name Description Example
log(parameter) Returns the logarithm of log(D1) returns 2
the specified parameter
if D1=100
(base number 10).
sqrt(parameter) Returns the square root sqrt(D1) returns 4
of the specified
if D1=16
parameter.
mod(dividend, Modulo mod(D1, 5) returns 1
divider)
if D1=16
pow(base number, Returns base number pow(D1, D2) returns 9
power) raised to the specified
if D1=3 D2=2
power.
hypot(side1,side2) hypot(D1, D2) returns 5
if D1=3 D2=4

side1

hypotenuse

side2
n!() Factorial n!(4) returns 24
(=1*2*3*4)
round(parameter, Round off according to round(P1, 0.1) returns
accuracy) given accuracy. 10.600
if P1=10.567
fMarketSize(materi Returns the next fMarketSize("S235JR",
al, thickness, available market size for 10, 0)
extrastep) the material from the
See also Using market
marketsize.dat sizes.
file, based on the
thickness you specify.
Insert the material in the
parentheses.
For extrastep enter a
number to define the
increment to the next size
(default is 0).

Statistical functions
The statistical functions are:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 89
Custom Components
 Example (P1=1.4
Name Description P2=2.3)
ceil() Returns the smallest whole ceil(P1) returns 2
number greater than or equal to
the specified parameter.
floor() Returns the largest whole floor(P1) returns 1
number less than or equal to the
specified parameter.
min() Returns the smallest of specified min(P1, P2) returns 1.4
parameters.
max() Returns the largest of specified max(P1, P2) returns 2.3
parameters.
sum() Sum of specified parameters sum(P1, P2) returns 3.7
sqsum() Sum of squared parameters: sqsum(P1, P2) returns 7.25
(parameter1)2 + (parameter2)2
ave() Average of parameters ave(P1, P2) returns 1.85
sqave() Average of squared parameters. sqave(P1, P2) returns 3.625

Data type conversions

Conversion functions perform conversions between the three supported data types, integers,
doubles and strings.

Name Description
int() Conversion to integer. This is
useful especially for calculating
profile dimensions:
100.0132222000 -> 100
double() Converts data to a double
string() Converts data to string

90 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 Name Description
imp() Converts imperial units to imp (1,1,1,2) meaning 1 foot
millimeters 1 1/2 inches returns 342.90
mm
imp(1,1,2) meaning 1 1/2
inches returns 38.10 mm
imp(1,2) meaning 1/2 inches
returns 12.70 mm
imp(1) meaning 1 inch
returns 25.40 mm
vwu(value Converts the value to vwu(4.0, "in") returns 101.6
, unit) millimeters. The available units mm
are:
• "ft" ("feet", "foot")
• "in" ("inch", "inches")
• "m"
• "cm"
• "mm"
• "rad"
• "deg"

String operations
Include string parameters inside double quotation marks within the argument list of string
operations.

Example
Name Description (P1="PL100*10")
match(parameter1 Returns 1 if parameters match(P1, "PL100*10")
, parameter2) are equal and 0 if returns 1
different.
Accept all profiles
You can also use starting with PFC:
wildcards *, ?, and [ ] match(P4, "PFC*")
with the match function. Accept profiles starting
with PFC, and height
starts with 2,3,4 or 5:
match(P4,
"PFC[2345]*")
Accept profiles starting
with PFC, heights are
200,300,400 or 500 and
width starts with 7:
match(P4,
"PFC[2345]00?7")
length(parameter) Returns the number of length(P1) returns 8
characters in the
parameter.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 91
Custom Components
 Example
Name Description (P1="PL100*10")
find(parameter, Returns the order number find(P1, "*") returns 5
string) (starting at zero) of the
specified string and -1 if
the specified string is not
found from the parameter.
getat(parameter, Returns the n:th (starting getat(P1, 1) returns "L"
n) at zero) character from the
parameter.
setat(parameter, n, Sets the n:th (starting at setat(P1, 0, "B") returns
character) zero) character to the "BL100*10"
specified character in the
parameter.
mid(string, n, x) Returns x characters from mid(P1,2,3) returns
the given string starting "100"
from n:th (starting at zero)
character. If you leave out
the last argument (x),
returns the last part of the
string.
reverse(string) Reverses the given string. reverse(P1) returns
"01*001LP"

When you handle strings in formulas, you must use quotation marks. For example, to define
profile size PL100*10 with two variables P2=100 and P3=10 enter the formula as follows:
="PL"+P2+"*"+P3

Tekla Structures handles bolt spacings as strings. To define bolt spacing,

select variable type to distance list and enter the formula like this:
=P1+" "+P2
This results in 100 200, if P1=100 (length) and P2=200 (length).

Trigonometric functions
You can include trigonometric functions in the formulae. Be sure to include the unit using the
following prefixes. If you do not include a prefix, Tekla Structures uses radians as the default
unit:
• d is degree. For example sin (d180)
• r is radians (Default). For example sin (r3.14) or sin (3.14)

Name Description
sin() Sine
cos() Cosine
tan() Tangent
asin() Inverse function of sin(), return value in radians
acos() Inverse function of cos(), return value in radians
atan() Inverse function of tan(), return value in radians

92 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 Name Description
sinh() Hyperbolical sine
cosh() Hyperbolical cosine
tanh() Hyperbolical tangent
atan2(,) Returns the angle whose tangent is the quotient of
two specified numbers. Return value in radians

Framing condition functions

The following functions return the skew, slope, and cant angle of the secondary beam relative
to the main part (column or beam).

Name Description Example

fAD("skew", ID) Returns the skewed angle fAD("skew", 12345)
of the secondary part, returns 45
whose ID is given.
where 12345 is the ID
of the secondary part,
which is in 45 degree
angle to main part.

fAD("slope", ID) Returns the sloped angle fAD("slope", 12345)

of the secondary part,
whose ID is given.

fAD("cant", ID) Returns the cant angle of fAD("cant", 12345)

rotated secondary part,
whose ID is given.

Beam to column Note that slope and skew are relative to a beam framing into a column.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 93
Custom Components
 Side view

Top view

Slope

Skew

Column

Beam

Beam to beam If you are working with two beams, "slope" is actually the skew of the beam framing into the
other beam, and the vertical slope of the beam relative to the main is actually the "skew" angle.

Side view

Top view

Skew

Slope

Beam

94 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
Limitations • These functions do not return positive and negative "slope" and "skew" values. So it is not
possible to determine up or down "slope" and left or right "skew" with these functions.
• Maximum skew angle to return is 45 degrees.

2.5 Defining custom component properties

This section explains how to add different properties for custom components.

Topics Adding an option to create parts (p. 95)

Defining bolt size and standard (p. 96)
Defining bolt group location (p. 97)
Replacing a sub-component (p. 99)
Changing the properties file (p. 101)
Defining meshes in custom components (p. 102)

Adding an option to create parts

To include an option to create or not create parts in a custom component properties dialog box:
1. In the Variables dialog box, add a new property
2. Set the Value type to Yes/No,
3. Set Visibility to Show
4. Enter a Label to display in the custom component dialog box:

5. In the custom component browser, link the property to a part:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 95
Custom Components
 6. Save the custom component and exit the custom component editor.
When you open the custom component properties dialog box, you now have the option to
create or not create the part:

Defining bolt size and standard

To add an option for selecting the bolt size in the custom component, you must add two
options:
• Bolt size
• Bolt standard
They work together and cannot be used separately.

To define the bolt size and standard options:

1. Click the Variables icon on the Custom Component editor toolbar to open the
Variables dialog box.
2. Click Add twice. Now you have two variables P1 and P2.
3. In the Value Type field, select Bolt size for P1 and Bolt standard for P2. Tekla Structures
automatically adds the extensions "_diameter" and "_screwdin" to the name of the
variables. Do not change these extensions.
4. Change P2_screwdin to P1_screwdin. The prefix must be the same, otherwise the variables
do not work.
5. Modify P1_diameter label to "Bolt size" and P1_screwdin label to"Bolt standard".

6. In the custom component browser, link the parameters to the bolt:

96 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 7. Save the custom component and exit the custom component editor.

Defining bolt group location

To define the vertical distance from the secondary beam top flange to the first bolt, we add the
following option to the custom component dialog box.

This option requires a distance that binds the bolt group handle to the secondary beam top
flange and a parameter for inputting the value in the user interface.
1. Double-click bolts in the custom component editor view. The Bolt properties dialog box
appears. Remove any dimensions from the Offset fields, then click Modify. Bolts will
move to the same level with the first handle of the bolt group.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 97
Custom Components
 2. Select the bolts, then select the top handle. Right-click and select Bind to plane from the
popup menu.

3. Select the top flange of the secondary beam.

4. A new distance parameter D1 appears in the Variables dialog box.

5. Click Add to add a new parameter P1. In the Formula field, change the distance value. In
the Label in dialog box field, enter a suitable label, for example: "Vertical distance to
bolt".
6. In the Formula field of D1, type in the equation "=-P1".

7. Save the custom component and exit the custom component editor.

Replacing a sub-component
Use the Name property in the Custom component browser to replace a sub-component inside
a custom component with another sub-component.
In this example we have created a custom component that contains a pair of cast-in embeds as
sub-components (castin1 and castin2):

98 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 Castin 1

Then we will replace castin1 with castin2.

To do this:
1. Select the custom component.
2. Right-click and select Edit custom component from the pop-up menu to open the custom
component editor.
3. In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter.
• In the Formula field, enter the name of the sub-component, castin1.
• Set Value type to Component name.
• Enter a name for the parameter in the Label in dialog box field and set Visibility to
Show.

4. In the Custom component browser, add the equation P1_name for both sub-
components:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 99
Custom Components
 The field Cast-in plate will appear in the dialog box of our custom component.

To change the sub-component:

1. Click the ... button next to the name field. The Select component dialog box opens.
2. Select the component to use (in our case castin2) and click OK.
3. In the custom component dialog box, click Modify. Tekla Structures changes the
component in the model.

100 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
 Castin 2

Changing the properties file

Use the Attribute file property in the Custom component browser to use different properties
files for sub-components in a custom component.
To add the properties file field to the custom component dialog box:
1. Select the custom component.
2. Right-click and select Edit custom component from the pop-up menu to open the custom
component editor.
3. In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter.
• In the Formula field, enter the name of the properties file (in our example, prop1).
• Set Value type to Component attribute file. Tekla Structures automatically adds the
extension _attrfile to the parameter name. Do not change this extension, but make sure
that the prefix is the same as for the component name (in our example, P1).
• Enter a name for the parameter (in our example, Properties file) in the Label in
dialog box field and set Visibility to Show.

4. In the Custom component browser, add the equation P1_attrfile for Attribute file.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 101

Custom Components
 To use another properties file for a sub-component, in the component’s dialog box, click the ...
button next to the Properties file field, and then select the properties file from a list:

Defining meshes in custom components

You can include rectangular meshes and change the mesh in your custom components.

To define a rectangular mesh type in a custom component:

1. Create the mesh in the model or in the Custom component editor. See Reinforcement
mesh (p. 161) for more information.
2. In the Custom component editor, select the mesh, right-click, and select Properties... to
open the Reinforcement properties dialog box.
3. Click the Select button next to the Mesh: field to open the Select mesh dialog box:

102 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
4. Copy the name of the mesh you want to use.

5. Click the Variables icon on the Custom component editor toolbar to open the
Variables dialog box.
6. Click Add.
7. In the Value Type field select the Text option.
8. Paste the mesh you copied into the Formula field.

9. In the Custom component browser, add "=P1" after Catalog name in Component >
Component objects > Reinforcement mesh > General properties.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 103

Custom Components
 10. Click the Close editor icon to close the Custom Component editor. Tekla
Structures prompts you to save your changes. Click Yes to save your changes. You have
now defined the mesh in the Custom Component editor.

If the mesh is defined in the custom component, other mesh properties,

for example, longitudinal diameters, override the properties defined in
the mesh catalog, so do not use Catalog name and other mesh properties
at the same time.

To change the mesh in the custom component:

1. Select the mesh in the 3d view.
2. Right-click and select Properties....
3. Copy and paste another mesh into the Parameter 1 field (in our example, the Mesh field).
4. Click Modify to save your changes.

Creating surface treatments in custom components

To create surface treatments in the Custom component editor:
1. Select Outline planes on the toolbar instead of Boundary planes (which is the default).

2. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment and select the command to create the surface
treatment.

104 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
 3. Optional: To select the surface treatment, set on the Select surface treatments selection

switch . This switch is set off in the Custom component editor by default.

2.6 Managing and using custom components

This section describes the custom component dialog box and explains how to use and manage
custom components.

Topics Custom component dialog box (p. 105)

Customizing the dialog box (p. 107)
Using a custom component (p. 111)
Managing custom components (p. 111)
Performing actions on custom components (p. 113)
Using Excel with custom components (p. 114)
Using ASCII files with custom component (p. 114)

Custom component dialog box

Tekla Structures automatically creates a dialog box when you define a custom component. By
default the dialog box has a General tab for connections, details, and seams and a Position tab
for parts.
Tekla Structures automatically creates tabs containing the parameters and distances you set to
visible in the custom component editor. Tabs are named Parameter 1, Parameter 2, etc. Each
tab can contain up to 25 fields. If you have more than 25 visible fields, Tekla Structures creates
another tab.
A typical custom component dialog box looks like this:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 105

Custom Components
 This information relates only to details

For seams you can select whether to place a seam at the point you pick, or let Tekla Structures
automatically place the seam.

106 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
 To place the seam at the point you pick, select the Place to picked
positions checkbox
To automatically place the seam, clear the Place to picked positions
checkbox, and select one of the positioning options

Tekla Structures creates an input file with the extension .inp for each dialog box in the model
folder. You can modify the input file. See Customizing the dialog box (p. 107).

If you modify the input file, then edit and save the custom component
dialog box using the custom component editor, you will lose the changes
you made to the input file.

Customizing the dialog box

To customize the dialog box that Tekla Structures creates for the custom component you need
to modify the input file which defines the dialog box. The input file has the same name as the
custom component and file extension inp. It is located in the model folder.

This topic is for advanced users. Take care when modifying an input file.
Errors may cause the dialog box to disappear.

The input file is a text file that you can edit using any text editor, for example Notepad.
You can customize the dialog box by:
• Changing the order of fields (p. 108)
• Changing the location of fields (p. 108)
• Renaming tabs (p. 109)
• Adding more tabs (p. 109)
• Adding pictures (p. 110)
• Preventing modifications (p. 110)

To use the modified custom component dialog box, save the input file,
then close and restart Tekla Structures.

Changing the order of fields

To change the order of fields, in the input file, change the last number in the parameter
definition, as shown below:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 107

Custom Components
 Change these numbers to change the order of fields (listed from to bottom
of dialog box)

Changing the location of fields

To change the location of fields, in the input file, change the last number in the parameter
definition. Enter three numbers to define the exact location of the field in the dialog box: the x
coordinate, y coordinate, and length of field. The example below shows these values for the
second field in the dialog box:

x = 374

y = 25

length = 160

Renaming tabs
To rename a tab, change the tab definition in the input file. You can rename any tab except the
General tab. In the example below, you would change the text Parameters 1 to the new tab
name (for example, Parts):

108 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
Adding more tabs
Each tab can contain 25 fields. If there are more than 25 visible fields, Tekla Structures creates
another tab. You can also add tabs by modifying the input file.
To add a second tab, edit the input file as shown below. Remember to adjust the location of the
fields, if necessary.

Remember to adjust the field location

The fourth tab is reserved for the General properties, so you cannot add
your own parameter to it.

Adding pictures
Add images to make your custom component easier to use. First create the image and save it as
a bitmap file (file extension bmp) in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder. To add the image to the custom
component dialog box, edit the input file as shown below:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 109

Custom Components
 y = 100

x = 50

height = 75

width = 100

The first pixel in the top left corner of a bitmap must be the same color
(gray) as the background of the dialog box.

Preventing modifications
Once the dialog box is ready, you can make the input file read-only to prevent accidental
modifications. If the input file is not read-only, and someone else updates the custom
component in the custom component editor, all your modifications to the input file will be lost.
To make the input file read-only:
1. In Windows Explorer, browse to find the input file.
2. Right-click the file and select Properties... .
3. Select the Read-only checkbox.
When an input file is read-only, and you try to update the custom component, Tekla Structures
displays a warning message saying that the *.inp file is read-only and changes to it will not
be saved. You have the following options:
• Click Cancel to return to the custom component editor.
• Click Continue to skip updating the *.inp file, but make all the other updates.

110 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
Using a custom component
To use a custom component in a model:
1. Use the keystrokes Ctrl + F to open the Component catalog dialog box.
2. In the Search results list box, select Custom. Tekla Structures lists all custom
components in the bottom pane.
3. Double-click a custom component in the list to open it’s properties dialog box.
4. Enter the properties you want to use and click Apply.
5. Tekla Structures prompts you to pick the parts or points and parts needed to create the
component.

Managing custom components

Use the Component catalog to manage custom components. To open the Component
catalog, use:
• keystrokes Ctrl + F or

• the Find a component icon on a components toolbar

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 111

Custom Components
 To find all custom components, select Custom in the Search result list
box
All custom components have the Number -1

To view the properties of a custom component, double-click its name

Exporting and importing

You can export custom components to a file, and then import the file into another model.

Exporting To export custom components to a file:

1. Select the custom components in the component catalog.
2. Right-click and select Export.... The Export components dialog box opens.
3. Enter a name for the file in the Selection field. By default, the file extension is .uel and
the file is located in the current model folder.

Importing To import custom components from a file:

1. Right-click the list of custom components in the component catalog and select Import....
The Import components dialog box opens.
2. Browse to find the exported file (*.uel), click the file name and then click OK.

If the custom component contains sketched cross sections, you need to

export and import both the sketches and the component.

To automatically import all *.uel files from a folder when creating a new model, use the
advanced option XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER.
After importing custom components, you can check from the Log file how many
components were succesfully imported. To open the log file, click Tools > Display log file >
Session History...

See also Performing actions on custom components (p. 113)

Protecting custom components with passwords

You can protect custom components with passwords. Password protection allows you to share
components while protecting your work.
To specify a password for a custom component:

Usage 1. Select the custom component you wish to protect and right-click.
2. To open the Custom component editor, select Edit Custom Component on the pop-up
menu.

3. In the Custom component editor, click the Display variables icon to display the
Variables dialog box.
4. In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter by clicking the Add button.
5. In the Name column, enter Password.
6. In the Formula column, enter the desired password.
Result

112 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
 After you have added this parameter, every time you try to edit this custom component Tekla
Structures asks for the password. Tekla Structures informs you about an incorrect password. If
you enter an incorrect password, you cannot use the custom component editor to modify the
component.

Example

Performing actions on custom components

Information regarding custom components is stored in the ComponentCatalog.txt file,
located in the model folder. If the properties of the file are set to read-only, the following
actions are not possible:
• adding to favorites
• adding to search results
• changing picture
• deleting the custom component
• editing keywords
• importing the custom component
• removing from search results
In these cases Tekla Structures displays a warning dialog box and the action is cancelled.
To change the properties of the file:
1. In Windows Explorer, browse to find the file.
2. Right-click the file and select Properties....
3. Clear the Read-only checkbox.

Using Excel with custom components

You can link Excel spreadsheets to custom components, for example, to check connections.
For custom components, you need to add the property Use external design to the custom
component dialog box.
1. Select the component, then right-click and select Edit custom component.

2. In the custom component editor, click to open the Variables dialog box.
3. Click Add and enter the following information:

4. Save the component and close the custom component editor. The custom component
dialog box now contains the Use external design property.

Spreadsheet The template spreadsheets are located in folder ..\Tekla

location Structures\<version>\environments\common\exceldesign.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 113

Custom Components
 By default, Tekla Structures searches for the spreadsheet in the following order:
• From the model folder: ..\<model>\exceldesign\.
• From folder defined with advanced option XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH

Spreadsheet The name of the file must be component_*component name*.xls. For example
name component_custom1.xls for a custom component named custom1.
For more information on the required Excel files, file locations and how to perform the
connection check with Excel, see Using Excel in connection design (p. 58).

Using ASCII files with custom component

You can use ASCII format files to get the default values from cold rolled files for custom
components, for example.
The format for reading files is following:
• fVF(filename, key value of row, column number)
• Key value for row is a unique text value (for example, HEA300).
• Column value is an index (integer) starting from 1.
• Function returns value as text.
• User will define the correct type for parameter in editor.

Example For example, in the custom component editor, add function fVF("Overlap.dat", "MET-
202Z25", 4) in the Variables dialog box.
The function gets the default value for bolt diameter 16.0 for profile MET-202Z25, from the
Overlap.dat file.

Key value of row

Column number

File search order Tekla Structures searches for the files as system files in the following order:
• model
• ..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\CustomComponentDialogFiles\
• project (set with advanced option XS_PROJECT)
• firm (set with advanced option XS_FIRM)
• system (set with advanced option XS_SYSTEM)

114 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
Tips on working with custom components
These tips will help you to efficiently create, save, and share parametric and non-parametric
custom components:

General Use library profiles when possible. So you do not have to copy user-defined profiles when
you copy the component to other locations.
Use short, logical names. Use the description field to describe the component and explain
what it does.
Store custom components together. It makes them easy to find and export. Consider creating
a component model. Use this model to create and test custom components.
Provide essential information. If you distribute your component to other users, remember to
list the profiles it works with.
Remember to copy user-defined profile cross sections with your custom component.

Creating non- Use the simplest part you can. For example, if all you need is a rectangular shape, use a
parametric rectangular plate, not a contour plate. Rectangular plates only have 2 handles, so you only need
components
to create a few bindings or magnetic planes to manipulate them. Contour plates require more
because they have 4 chamfers and handles, when you set the advanced option
XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES to CHAMFERS or HANDLES.

Rectangular plate

Contour plate

Only model parts as accurately as you need. If the only part information required is a part
mark on the GA drawing and a quantity on the materials list, create a simple bar or plate. If,
later, you need to include it in a detailed view, simply re-model the part more accurately.

Creating Plan to use magnetic planes to bind objects together. This makes intelligent components
intelligent simpler, and easier to use, because it reduces the number of dimensions and parameters the user
(parametric)
components must enter. Model as many parts on the same plane as you can, and then use offsets to position
them accurately.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 115

Custom Components
 Not using magnetic planes:
Pick all 10 handles to bind the parts together
Using 3 magnetic planes:
Pick 3 points to bind the parts together (pick 1 point on each magnetic
plane)

Model embeds as custom parts and include them in components.

Create simple components for specific situations. It is faster and easier to model simple
components. They are also much easier to use. Avoid creating a ’super’ component to use in
every possible situation.

2.7 Custom components reference

This section consists of the reference pages for the custom component commands.
The following table lists the commands used to define, create, and manage custom components.

Command Icon Description

Detailing > Component Starts the custom component wizard
> Define Custom which guides you through defining a
Component... (p. 117) custom component.
Display variables (p. Displays a list of distance and
120) parameter variables.

Browser (p. 124) Displays the custom component

browser that shows the contents of a
custom component in a hierarchical,
tree-like structure.
Plane types (p. 125) Defines which planes can be selected.
Construction plane (p. The command to create your own plane.
126)

116 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
 Command Icon Description
Custom component Allows you to edit the type or the
settings (p. 127) position of a custom component or add
notes after you have created the
component
Create distance (p. 128) The command to create distance
variables.

Create reference The command to create variable

distance (p. 129) reference distancies.

Automatic distances (p. Automatically generates distance

130) variables for custom component
objects.

Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component...

Synopsis This command defines a new custom component and saves it to a library for later use.

Preconditions All the necessary objects (parts, cuts, fittings, bolts, etc.) must exist in the model, because you
will need to select different objects, points etc. to define the custom component. See also
Exploding components (p. 66).

Description This command defines a simple custom component, which you can use in similar locations to
where it was originally created. This component is not parametric and Tekla Structures does not
adjust dimensions to suit any changes in the model. To create a parametric custom component,
see Editing custom components (p. 73).

Field Description More information

Type Affects how the user inserts the custom Component types (p. 10)
component into the model. Also defines
if the custom component connects to
existing parts.
Name Unique name for the custom
component. If the name already exists,
the Next button is grayed out.
Description Short description of the custom
component. This will be shown in the
component browser.
Component To include this in drawings, include Mark elements
identifier Code in the connection mark.
Up direction The default up direction. Used only in
connections and details.
Position type Position (or origin) of the connection, Position type (p. 119)
relative to the main part.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 117

Custom Components
 Field Description More information
Detail type Determines on which side of the main Only affects asymmetric
part the detail is located. The options details (for example a
are: one-side stiffener).
Intermediate detail - Tekla Structures
creates all details on the same side of
the main part.
End detail - Tekla Structures creates all
details on the side of the main part
closest to the detail.
Definition point The position you pick to create the Only available for details
position in detail, relative to the main part. and connections.
relation to
primary part For connections, this determines where
the connection is created, relative to the
secondary part.
Allow multiple When checked, allows you to create Only available for
instances of many connections to the same main connections.
connection part, in different locations.
between same This is always possible
parts for details.
Exact positions When you select this checkbox, Tekla Only available for seams.
Structures positions the seam based on
the positions you pick in the model.
If you clear this checkbox, Tekla
Structures uses automatic seam
recognition to position the seam. This is
useful especially with warped seams.
Use the center of When you select this checkbox, Tekla Only available for parts.
the bounding box Structures positions the custom part
in positioning based on the center of its bounding box
(the box which surronds the actual part
profile).

Usage 1. Click Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... to start the Custom
component wizard.
2. Select a Type and enter the other properties, then click Next.
3. Select the objects that the custom component will create.
4. Click Next.
5. The next step differs depending on the Type you select in step 2:
• For connections, select the main part, click Next, then select the secondary part(s).
• For details, select the main part, and click Next.
To position the detail by the main part, select Main part, and go to step 6.
To position the detail by a reference point, select Reference point, and then pick a
point.
• For seams, select the main part, click Next, then select the secondary part, click Next,
then pick two points to indicate the seam location.
• For parts, pick one or two points.
6. Click Finish.

See also Defining a custom component (p. 66)

Editing custom components (p. 73)
Using a custom component (p. 111)
Managing custom components (p. 111)

118 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
Position type
Synopsis Defines the position (or origin) of the custom component, relative to the main part. This
command is available in the custom component wizard. Position type affects which type of
main parts you can use the custom component with.

Preconditions

Description Determines the location of the objects the custom component creates, relative to main part. The
options are:

• Middle
Where the center lines of the
main and secondary parts
intersect.

• Box plane
Where the main part box and
the center line of the
secondary part intersect.

• Collision plane
Where the main part and the
center line of the secondary
part intersect.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 119

Custom Components
 • End end plane
Where the center line of the
secondary part hits the end of
the main part.

• Gusset plane
Where the center lines of the
main part and the first
secondary part intersect. The
x direction is perpendicular
to the center line of the main
part.

Display variables

Synopsis Shows all variables and lets you to add new parameter variables. You can also use it to manage
distance and parameter variables.
Tekla Structures uses variables with the following features:
• Custom Components (p. 65)
• Sketched cross sections

Preconditions To use this command, you must:

Feature Preconditions
Custom components • define a custom component, see Defining a
custom component (p. 66)
• open the Custom component editor, see Custom
component editor (p. 74)
Sketched cross • open the Cross section sketch editor, see
sections Sketched cross sections

Description Variables are the properties of a custom component/sketch/parametric model.

Use the Add button to add parameter variables.
To add new distance variables, use the commands
• Create distance (p. 128) or Automatic distances (p. 130) for custom components.
• Sketch free distance, Sketch horizontal distance, or Sketch vertical distance for
sketched cross sections.
Use the Delete button to delete selected parameters and distances.
You define the following properties for a variable:

120 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
 Field Description More information
Variable name A unique name for variable. Use Custom component
this name to refer to the variable browser (p. 76)
in the custom component or in
Sketch Browser
the sketch browser.
Formula Can contain a value or a Creating parameters
formula. Copy values using the that use formulae (p.
popup menu in the browser. See 86)
Custom component browser
Functions to use in
(p. 76). formulas (p. 87)
Formulae begin with =
Variable value Shows the current value from
the formula field.
Variable type Distance or parameter. Defining variables
(p. 78)
Adding dimensions
to a sketched cross
section
Value type Defines the type of information Display variables (p.
to input. 120)
Visibility Shows or hides the variable. Custom component
dialog box (p. 105)
Label The field name.
Maximum length is 30
characters.

Usage Usage depends on the feature:

Feature Usage
Custom components • Creating distance variables (p. 79)
• Creating reference distances (p. 81)
• Creating parameter variables (p. 85)
Sketched cross • Variables
sections

Value types The options are:

Value type Description

Number A whole (integer) number. Used for quantity and multiplier.
Length A decimal (floating point) number. User for lengths and distances.
Length numbers have unit (mm, inch etc.) and are rounded to two places
of decimals.
Tekla Structures enables millimeter to inch conversion for the Length
and Distance list types.
Text A text (ascii) string.
Factor A decimal value without a unit. You can set the number of decimals for
the value type in Tools > Options > Options... > Units and decimals.
Angle A special decimal number type for storing angles, stored to 1 place of
decimals, in radians.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 121

Custom Components
 Value type Description
Material A special data type linked to the material catalog. On input you can
select material from the standard material dialog.
Profile A special data type linked to the profile catalog. On input you can select
profile from the standard profile dialog.
Bolt size Special data types linked to the bolt catalog. Bolt size works with Bolt
standard. They have fixed naming: Px_diameter and
Bolt standard
Px_screwdin. Do not change the fixed name.
To automatically show values for these in the component’s dialog box, x
must be the same for both, for example, P1_diameter and
P1_screwdin.

Bolt type For defining the bolt type (site/workshop) in the custom component
dialog box. Linked to the Bolt type property of bolts in the Custom
component browser.

Stud size Special data types linked to the bolt catalog. Stud size works with Stud
standard. They have fixed naming: Px_size and Px_standard. Do
Stud standard
not change the fixed name.
To automatically show values for these in the component’s dialog box, x
must be the same for both, for example, P9_size and
P9_standard.

Distance list For fields with several length values, such as bolt spacings.

122 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
Value type Description
Weld type A special data type for selecting weld type.

Weld types
Chamfer type A special data type for defining the shape of a chamfer.
Welding site A special data type for defining the welding place: workshop or building
site.
Rebar grade Special data types linked to reinforcement catalog. Rebar grade, Rebar
size, and Rebar bending radius work together. They have fixed
Rebar size
naming format: Px_grade, Px_size, and Px_radius where the x
Rebar bending is a number. Do not change the fixed name.
radius
To automatically show values for these in the component's dialog box, x
must be the same for all, for example, P1_grade, P1_size, and
Px_radius.

Reinforcement For defining meshes in custom components. Linked to the Catalog

mesh name property of reinforcement meshes in the Custom component
browser.
Component For replacing a subcomponent inside a custom component with another
name subcomponent. Linked to the Name property of objects in the Custom
component browser.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 123

Custom Components
 Value type Description
Component For setting the properties of a subcomponent inside a custom
attribute file component. Works with Component name using the format Px_name
and Px_attrfile, where the x is a number. Do not change the fixed
name.
To automatically show values for these in the component's dialog box, x
must be the same for both, for example, P2_name and
P2_attrfile.

Yes/No For defining whether or not Tekla Structures creates an object in a

custom component. Linked to the Creation property of objects in the
Custom component browser.

Browser

Synopsis This command shows the browser for the following features.
• Custom component: Custom component browser
• Sketched cross section: Display sketch browser

Preconditions To open the browser:

Feature Preconditions
Custom components • Define a custom component, see Defining a
custom component (p. 66)
• Open the Custom component editor, see
Custom component editor (p. 74)
Sketched cross Open the Cross section sketch editor, see Opening
sections the cross section sketch editor

Description The browser shows the objects, their properties, and hierarchy included in the:
• Custom component
• Sketched cross section

Usage Usage depends on the feature:

124 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
 Feature Usage
Custom components Custom component browser (p. 76)
Sketched cross Sketch Browser
sections

Plane types
Synopsis This command changes the plane type.

Preconditions Open the Custom component editor. See Custom component editor (p. 74).

Description You need planes to define distance variables. For example, you can bind the reference point of
a plate to the top plane of a beam.
You can change the plane type when the Create distance command is active. See Create
distance (p. 128).
The table below shows an example of each plane type:

Plane type Example Definition

Boundary planes The edges of a box
surrounding a profile.

Center planes The center planes of a

profile

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 125

Custom Components
 Plane type Example Definition
Outline planes The outer and inner
surfaces of a profile.

Cut planes If parts contain line, part,

or polygon cuts, this
option selects the cut
surfaces. Fittings cannot
be selected.

Component Depends on which

planes Position type the custom
component originally
had.

Grid planes Shows grid planes.

This plane type is only
available in models and
sketches.

Boundary and component planes work for most profile types, so try to
use them whenever you can.

Usage To see which planes are available in each group:

1. Select a plane type from the Custom component toolbar.
2. Move the mouse cursor over a component view. Tekla Structures highlights the available
planes.

See also Creating distance variables (p. 79)

Construction plane

Synopsis This command creates a construction plane. If the plane is magnetic, the objects directly on it
move with the plane.

126 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
Preconditions

Description You may occasionally need to define your own planes. For example, when you create special
model parameters for floor height, building width, etc.
Magnetic planes are also useful. You can use them to bind and move groups of objects. Rather
than binding lots of handles and chamfers to faces, simply create a user plane that goes through
all the handles and chamfers. Then make this plane magnetic and bind the plane to the
appropriate face. When you move the plane, the attached handles and chamfers move with it.
The custom component editor contains many default planes, for more information see Plane
types (p. 125).

Usage To add a construction plane:

1. Click the Create construction plane icon.
2. Pick four points.
3. Click the middle mouse button. Tekla Structures draws the plane.

4. Double-click the plane in the model. The Construction plane properties dialog box
appears.
5. Type a name for the plane.
6. Select Magnetic, if you want Tekla Structures to bind touching objects to the plane. When
you move a magnetic plane, objects directly on that plane automatically move with it.

Tekla Structures only binds objects to the plane whose reference points
are directly on the plane. By default the magnetic distance is 0.05 mm.
To change this use the variable XS_MAGNETIC_PLANE_OFFSET.

7. Click Modify.

See also Plane types (p. 125)

Custom component settings

Synopsis With this command you can go back and change the settings which you have used for defining
a custom component.

Preconditions To use this command in the Custom component editor, you must:
• Define a custom component, see Defining a custom component (p. 66).
• Open the Custom component editor, see Custom component editor (p. 74).

Description You can do the following changes after you have created a custom component:
• Add notes
• Change the position
• Allow multiple instances

Usage To add notes:

1. In the Customer component editor, click the Custom component settings icon.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 127

Custom Components
 2. On the Type/Notes tab, insert the notes you want to add to the Description field.
To change the position type:
1. In the Customer component editor, click the Custom component settings icon.
2. On the Position tab, change the Position type. Tekla Structures repositions the planes.
The objects retain their relative position to the component planes, and they must be moved
back into position manually.
In many cases you need to use a component inside another component, or make a complex
connection out of simple connections. To apply multiple connections to the same main part,
select the Allow multiple instances of connection between same parts checkbox. By default
this checkbox is not selected.
To allow multiple instances:
1. In the Customer component editor, click the Custom component settings icon.
2. On the Advanced tab, select the Allow multiple instances of connection between same
parts checkbox.

Create distance

Synopsis Creates a distance variable. You can create a distance variable from any of the following
objects to a plane:
• construction plane
• reference points of parts (only custom component objects)
• reference points of bolt groups
• chamfers
• part cut handles
• line cuts
• fittings

Preconditions To use this command in the Custom component editor, you must:
• define a custom component, see Defining a custom component (p. 66)
• open the Custom component editor, see Custom component editor (p. 74)
To use this command in a model, click Modeling > Add Distance > Fixed.

Description Distances are dependencies that bind two parts together. You can also use distances to define
part dimensions, bolt edge distances, gaps, etc. For example:

128 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
 Distances
These distances bind plate’s reference points to the top and bottom plane
of a beam

You define the following properties for distance variables:

Field Description
Name Name of the distance variable.
Shown in the custom component
dialog box.
Value Numeric value of distance.

Usage See Creating distance variables (p. 79).

To see all distances included in the custom component, open the Variables dialog box. For
more information, see Defining variables (p. 78).

See also Automatic distances (p. 130)

Plane types (p. 125)

Create reference distance

Synopsis Creates a variable reference distance between objects.

Preconditions To use this command in the Custom component editor, you must:
• define a custom component, see Defining a custom component (p. 66)
• open the Custom component editor, see Custom component editor (p. 74)
To use this command in a model, click Modeling > Add Distance > Reference.

Description Use reference distances in calculations, for example, for determining the spacing of rungs in a
ladder.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 129

Custom Components
Usage See Creating reference distances (p. 81).
To see all distances included in the custom component, open the Variables dialog box. For
more information, see Defining variables (p. 78).

See also Plane types (p. 125)

Creating distance variables (p. 79)
Automatic distances (p. 130)

Automatic distances

Synopsis Creates distance variables for picked objects.

The distance variables are created between the picked objects and the main and the secondary
parts of a connection or a detail.

The command does not work with custom parts since they do not have a
main part.

Preconditions Open the Custom component editor (p. 74).

Description This command attaches picked objects, or their reference points or handles, to existing planes,
if the objects, or their reference points or handles, are located exactly on the plane. Tekla
Structures creates distance variables from a maximum of three direction to existing planes.
Tekla Structures selects planes in the following order:
• Construction plane (p. 126)
• Custom Components (p. 65)
• Plane types (p. 125)

Usage 1. Click the Automatic distances icon.

130 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Custom Components
2. Pick any type of an object that has handles.
3. Click the middle mouse button to complete the command.
4. To check the created distances, open the Display variables (p. 120) dialog box.

For reinforcement you may have to remove some distances. If the last
handle is bound to too many planes and the concrete cross-section
enlarges, the other end of the reinforcement might not react to changes.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 131

Custom Components
132 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom Components
 3 Reinforcement

Introduction Once you have created a model of concrete parts, you will need to reinforce the parts.
This chapter explains how to create reinforcement in Tekla Structures. It also includes a general
description of reinforcement properties and an overview of reinforcement commands.

Audience This chapter is aimed at concrete detailers and designers.

Assumed Before you start to create reinforcement, you need to have concrete parts in your model, as
background explained in Concrete Detailing.
Running the structural analysis as explained in Analysis and Design gives you the required
area of reinforcement. Read Loads for instructions on how to create loads.

See also Numbering reinforcements

3.1 Getting started with reinforcement

In Tekla Structures, you can use different methods to create reinforcement. You can create:
• Single reinforcing bars
• Reinforcing bar groups
• Reinforcement meshes
• Reinforcement components.

Concepts We recommend that you use reinforcement components to create reinforcement whenever
possible. They are adaptive, attached to a concrete part, and updated automatically if the
dimensions of the reinforced part change, for example. Then create additional reinforcing bars
using other tools.
Reinforcing bar groups consist of several identical, or very similar, bars. Tekla Structures
always treats these bars as a group, modifies them in the same way, deletes them all at the same
time, etc.
Reinforcement meshes include bars in two perpendicular directions, i.e. main bars and
crossing bars. Tekla Structures treats mesh bars as one unit but distinguishes the main and
crossing bars.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 133

Reinforcement
Reinforcement Every reinforcement object has properties which define it (for example, grade, diameter or size,
properties minimum bending radius). Use the reinforcement properties dialog boxes to view or modify the
properties of reinforcement. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement to open
reinforcement properties dialog boxes, or double-click an existing reinforcement object in the
model.

Filtering by You can use reinforcement properties in filters. For example, you can select, modify, or hide
properties reinforcing bars based on their properties.For more information, see Filtering objects.

In reports and You can include reinforcement properties and user-defined attributes in drawing and report
drawings templates.

See also Basic reinforcement properties (p. 134)

Getting Started (p. 9) with Detailing

3.2 Basic reinforcement properties

This section explains properties that are common to most types of reinforcement in Tekla
Structures.

Name You can enter names for reinforcing bars. Tekla Structures uses names in reports and drawing
tables.

Grade The strength of the steel used in reinforcing bars. Can also indicate other factors, such as the
weldability or surface deformations of the bar.

Size Depending on the environment, the nominal diameter of the bar, or a mark that defines the
diameter.

Bending radius Complies with the design code you are using. Main bars, stirrups, ties, and hooks usually have
their own minimum internal bending radii, which are proportional to the diameter of the
reinforcing bar. The actual bending radius is normally chosen to suit the size of the mandrels on
the bar-bending machine.

Bending types Tekla Structures reinforcing bar bending types are recognized using internal bending type
definitions. Internal bending types are hard coded to the software. However, these internal
bending types are mapped to area specific reinforcing bar bending type codes in the
rebar_schedule_config.inp file in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system\ folder. This
file can be localized to match local requirements.
For more information on internal bending types, see Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 167).

Reinforcement Grade–size–radius combinations are predefined in the reinforcement catalog. You can select
catalog which catalog to use, and add, modify, and delete the information it contains. See The
reinforcing bar catalog.

Select... To define the grade, size, and bending radius of a reinforcing bar, click Select... next to the
Grade, Size, and Bending radius fields in the Reinforcing bar properties dialog box. The
Select reinforcing bar dialog box appears, showing the available bar sizes for the chosen
grade. You can also define whether the bar is a main bar or a stirrup or tie:

134 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
 You can also enter the grade, size, and bending radius of individual
reinforcing bars using the appropriate fields in the Reinforcing bar
properties dialog box.

Class Use Class to group reinforcement. To display reinforcing bars of different classes in different
colors, click View > Representation > Object Representation... and select Color by class
from the Color list box. For more information, see Color settings for parts.

Bar groups Reinforcing bar groups mainly have the same properties as single reinforcing bars. They can
also have the following extra properties:
• Number of bars
• Spacing (see Spacing reinforcing bars (p. 138))
• Tapering (see Tapered bar group (p. 157))

See also Hooks (p. 135)

Concrete cover (p. 137)
Spacing reinforcing bars (p. 138)
Omitting reinforcing bars (p. 138)
User-defined attributes of reinforcement (p. 139)
Meshes (p. 139)
Numbering reinforcements

Hooks
To add hooks to the ends of reinforcing bars for anchoring purposes, use the Hooks section of
the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box, or the Hooks tab in the Reinforcement Mesh
Properties dialog box:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 135

Reinforcement
 The options for the hook at the beginning and end of the bar are:

Option Description
No hook
Standard 90-degree hook
Standard 135-degree hook
Standard 180-degree hook
Custom hook

The reinforcement catalog contains predefined dimensions for all standard hooks (minimum
bending radius, minimum hook length). See The reinforcing bar catalog.

Custom hook To manually define the angle, radius, and length of a hook, select the Custom hook option and
enter values to the following fields in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box:

Field Description
Angle Enter a value between –
180 and +180 degrees.
Radius Internal bending radius of
the hook.
Use the same radius for
the hook and for the
reinforcing bar. If the
hook and the reinforcing
Angle
bar have different
radiuses, Tekla Structures
does not recognize the Radius
shape of the reinforcing
bar.
Length
Length Length of the straight part
of the hook.
If the length is set to zero,
no hooks are created.

136 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
Concrete cover
Reinforcing bars need a concrete cover, to protect them against harmful elements, such as the
weather and fire. When you create single bars, Tekla Structures uses the thickness of concrete
cover to determine the position of the bar. You pick points to define the shape and plane of the
bar.

Cover thickness Use the Cover thickness fields in the reinforcement properties dialog boxes to define concrete
cover.

Example To create a beam stirrup, pick the corner points on the cross-sectional end plane of the beam to
define the bar shape and plane. The cover thickness on the plane is the distance from beam’s
bottom, top, and side surfaces to the stirrup. The cover thickness from the plane is the distance
from the end surface of the beam to the stirrup, and perpendicular to the bar plane.

Concrete cover Description

Concrete cover on the plane
For example, the distances from a beam’s bottom,
top, and side surfaces to a stirrup.
To specify different concrete covers on the
different legs of a reinforcing bar, enter a thickness
value for each leg in the On plane field, in the
order you pick points to create the bar. If you enter
less values than there are bar legs, Tekla Structures
uses the last value for remaining legs.
Concrete cover from the plane
For example, the distance from a beam’s end
surface to the closest stirrup, perpendicular to the
stirrup plane.

Leg length At the start and end point of a reinforcing bar, you can also define the concrete cover in terms
of cover thickness or leg length.

Option Description
Cover thickness Defines the distance from the bar end to
the concrete surface.
Leg length Defines the length of the ultimate leg of
the bar.

To define the length of an ultimate leg of a bar, use the Leg length
option and the Snap to nearest points switch. Then pick anywhere on a
part edge or line to indicate the direction for the bar leg.

Reinforcement When you use reinforcement components, Tekla Structures places the reinforcement using the
components dimensions of the part and the values in the Cover thickness field, or the graphic fields shown
below:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 137

Reinforcement
Spacing reinforcing bars
Bar groups There are several ways to distribute bars in a reinforcing bar group.
To create a bar group, open the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box. On the Group tab,
select an option from the Creation method list box. The options are:

Option Description
By exact spacing Creates fixed, equal spaces between the bars. The
value with flexible first space adjusts to even out bar distribution.
first space Enter the spacing value in the Exact spacing value
field. If the first space is less than 10% of the exact
spacing value, Tekla Structures removes one bar.
By exact spacing Same as the first option, but the last space adjusts
value with flexible to even out bar distribution.
last space
By exact spacing Same as the first option, but the middle space
value with flexible adjusts to even out bar distribution. If there are an
middle space odd number of bars (two middle spaces), the other
middle space adjusts to even out bar distribution.
By exact spacing Same as the first option, but both the first and last
value with flexible spaces adjust to even out bar distribution.
first and last space
By exact spacings Distributes the bars using the information you
specify in the Exact spacing values field, so you
can enter every spacing value manually. Use the
multiplication character to repeat spacings, e.g.
5*200, to create five spaces of 200.
Equal distribution by Tekla Structures determines the spacing value
number of based on the fixed number of bars. Enter the
reinforcing bars number in the Number of reinforcing bars field.
Equal distribution by Tekla Structures aims the spacing value as closely
target spacing value as possible at the value in the Target spacing
value field and determines the number of bars
compatibly.

See also Omitting reinforcing bars (p. 138)

Omitting reinforcing bars

You may occasionally need to omit specific reinforcing bars. For example, when several
reinforced areas intersect, causing reinforcing bars to overlap, or when you want to start bar
distribution at a specific distance from the end of a part.
To indicate which bars to omit, select an option from the Reinforcing bar(s) not to be created
to the group list box:
• None (all reinforcing bars included)

138 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
 • First
• Last
• First and last

See also Spacing reinforcing bars (p. 138)

User-defined attributes of reinforcement

Create user-defined attributes to add information about reinforcing bars, bar groups, or
reinforcement meshes. Attributes can consist of numbers, text, or lists.
To create user-defined attributes, click the User-defined attributes button in the reinforcement
properties dialog box. Use the User field 1...4 fields to define the attributes you need.
You can also change the name of these fields, and add new ones, by editing the
objects.inp file. For more information, see Adding properties.

Meshes
A reinforcement mesh consists of reinforcing bars in two directions. You can define the
following properties.

Diameter 2

Spacing 2

Overhang

Spacing 1

Diameter 1

Length

Overhang

Width

Create mesh Create mesh using the Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Reinforcement Mesh command
or a component.

Mesh shape Reinforcement meshes can be:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 139

Reinforcement
 • Rectangular
• Polygonal
• Bent

Distribution You can create meshes with unevenly-spaced bars. You can also define a different bar size or
pattern of bars multiple different bar sizes for the longitudinal bars and the crossing bars.
Multiple bar sizes enable pattern creation. For example, if you enter bar diameters 20 2*6 in
the longitudinal direction, Tekla Structures creates a pattern with one size 20 bar and two size 6
bars. This pattern can be repeated in the mesh along the longitudinal direction.

For more information, see Customizing reinforcement meshes (p. 151).

Mesh size The way you define the size of the mesh depends on the shape of the mesh and how it was
created:
• Evenly-spaced rectangular meshes - manually define the size
• Polygonal and bent meshes - Tekla Structures automatically calculates the width and
length
• Unevenly-spaced meshes - Tekla Structures calculates the size of the mesh using the
values in the Distance(s), Left overhang, and Right overhang fields.

See also Reinforcement mesh (p. 161)

3.3 Working with reinforcement

This section explains how to create, place, attach, and modify reinforcement.

Topics Placing reinforcement (p. 140)

Attaching reinforcement to parts (p. 141)
Modifying reinforcement (p. 141)
Customizing reinforcement meshes (p. 151)
Defining custom reinforcement components (p. 153)

Placing reinforcement
To place a reinforcing bar group, pick two sets of points:
1. The first set of points defines the plane of the first bar and the shape of a single bar in the
group. Click the middle mouse button to end picking.
2. Pick a second set of points to indicate the distribution direction and length of the bars.
To place reinforcement components, select the part to reinforce.
See also Using reinforcement handles (p. 142).

140 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
Attaching reinforcement to parts
Attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit when you want the reinforcing bars to follow the part
or cast unit if it is moved, copied, deleted, etc.
Tekla Structures automatically attaches a reinforcement to the part you pick before you place
the reinforcement. You can also manually attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit.

You must attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit to have Tekla

Structures merge automatic reinforcing bar marks. See Merged
reinforcement marks.

Attaching To manually attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit:

manually
1. Select the reinforcement to attach.
2. Right-click and select Attach to Part from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the part to attach the reinforcement to.

Detaching To detach reinforcement from a part:

1. Select the reinforcement to detach.
2. Right-click and select Detach from Part from the pop-up menu.

Modifying reinforcement
To modify a single reinforcing bar, bar group, or reinforcement mesh, double-click the
reinforcement to open the properties dialog box.
To modify the properties of a reinforcement component, double-click the blue modeling tool
symbol (M).
To update the reinforcing bar, bar group, reinforcement mesh, or component you selected, click
Modify.

Topics Changing reinforcement shape (p. 141)

Using reinforcement handles (p. 142)
Using adaptivity (p. 143)
Ungrouping a reinforcement (p. 145)
Grouping reinforcements (p. 147)
Adding points to a reinforcement (p. 148)
Removing points from a reinforcement (p. 149)
Splitting reinforcing bar groups (p. 150)
Splitting reinforcing bars in a group (p. 150)
Combining two reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups into one (p. 150)
Exploding reinforcement (p. 150)

Changing reinforcement shape

To change the shape of the reinforcement, you can:
• Add bar corners
• Remove bar corners
• Move bar and mesh corners
• Add points to reinforcing bars, bar groups, and bent meshes

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 141

Reinforcement
 • Remove points from reinforcing bars, bar groups, and bent meshes
• Change the direction of the longitudinal mesh bars
• Change the distribution length of bar groups

Using reinforcement handles

Tekla Structures uses handles to indicate:
• The ends and corners of a reinforcing bar
• The distribution length of a bar group
• The corners and main bar direction of a mesh
When you select a reinforcement, the handles turn magenta.

Examples Here are some ways to use handles to modify reinforcement:

Handles to change group distribution length

Handles to move bar corners

142 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
 Handles to move mesh corners

Handles to change main bar direction

To use handles to modify reinforcement:

1. Select the reinforcement to display its handles.
2. Click the handle you want to move. Tekla Structures highlights the handle.
3. Move the handle(s) like any other object. If Drag and drop is active, just drag the handle
to a new position.
For more information, see Moving an object, Moving an object using drag-and-drop and
Polygon cuts.

Using adaptivity
Reinforcements follow the shape of the part also when their handles are located on the face or
edge of the part.
The following types of adaptivity are available:
• Fixed adaptivity: handles retain their absolute distances to the nearest part faces.
• Relative adaptivity: handles retain their relative distances to the nearest part faces in
relation to the part’s overall size.
To modify the general adaptivity settings, go to Tools > Options > Options... > General.
You can modify the adaptivity settings for each part separately. These modifications override
the general settings.

Example • Reinforcing bars in their original positions:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 143

Reinforcement
 • Fixed adaptivity:

• Relative adaptivity:

144 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
 Ungrouping a reinforcement
You can ungroup reinforcing bar groups and reinforcement meshes. Only reinforcements where
each reinforcing bar is in one plane can be ungrouped.
To ungroup a reinforcement:
1. Click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Ungroup.
2. Select one of the reinforcing bars in a reinforcing bar group or in a reinforcement mesh.
The reinforcing bar group is replaced with single reinforcing bars. The single bars get
the same properties and offsets as the group.
If you ungroup a reinforcement mesh, the offsets for single bars are zero.

Limitations You cannot ungroup circular or curved reinforcing bar groups.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 145

Reinforcement
Example

Before ungrouping:

After ungrouping:

See also Grouping reinforcements (p. 147)

Reinforcing bar (p. 155)
Reinforcing bar group (p. 156)
Reinforcement mesh (p. 161)

146 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
 Grouping reinforcements
You can group single reinforcing bars and reinforcing bar groups. Only reinforcements where
each reinforcing bar is in one plane can be grouped. All groups are created with exact spacings.
Single reinforcing bars need to have the same bending shape.
To group single reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups:
1. Click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Group.
2. Select all the reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups that you want to group.
3. Click the middle mouse button.
4. Select one reinforcing bar or reinforcing bar group to copy the properties from.
The new group gets the same properties as the selected reinforcing bar.

The reinforcing bar or reinforcing bar group that you copy the properties
from is also added to the group. This means, for example, that you
cannot copy properties from a separate reinforcing bar group which you
do not want to include in your new reinforcing bar group.

Limitations You cannot create circular or curved reinforcing bar groups by grouping.

Example

Before grouping:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 147

Reinforcement
 After grouping:

See also Ungrouping a reinforcement (p. 145)

Reinforcing bar (p. 155)
Reinforcing bar group (p. 156)

Adding points to a reinforcement

You can modify the shape of a single reinforcing bar, reinforcing bar group, or a bent mesh by
adding points to the reinforcement.
To add points to a reinforcement:
1. Select a single reinforcing bar, a reinforcing bar group, or a bent mesh.
2. Click Detailing > Modify Polygon Shape.
3. Pick the first existing polygon point (1).
4. Pick new points (2, 3).
5. Pick the second existing polygon point (4).

The new points are added to the reinforcement, and the shape of the reinforcement is
modified.

148 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
Limitations You cannot modify the shape of polygonal or rectangular meshes, or the shape of tapered
reinforcing bar groups by adding points.

See also Removing points from a reinforcement (p. 149)

Modifying the shape of a polygon

Removing points from a reinforcement

You can modify the shape of a single reinforcing bar, reinforcing bar group, or a bent mesh by
removing points from the reinforcement.
To remove points from a reinforcement:
1. Select a single reinforcing bar, a reinforcing bar group, or a bent mesh.
2. Click Detailing > Modify Polygon Shape.
3. Pick the first existing polygon point (1).
4. Pick the second existing polygon point (2).
5. Pick a point to be removed (3 or 4).
The point to be removed needs to be in between the two previously picked (1) and (2)
points.

The points are removed from the reinforcement, and the shape of the reinforcement is
modified.

Limitations You cannot modify the shape of polygonal or rectangular meshes, or the shape of tapered
reinforcing bar groups by removing points.

See also Adding points to a reinforcement (p. 148)

Modifying the shape of a polygon

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 149

Reinforcement
 Splitting reinforcing bar groups
You can split normal and tapered reinforcing bar groups into two groups.
1. Click Edit > Split.
2. Select the reinforcing bar group.
3. Pick two points to indicate where to split the group.

You cannot split reinforcing bar groups diagonally.

See also Splitting reinforcing bars in a group (p. 150)

Combining two reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups into one (p. 150)

Splitting reinforcing bars in a group

You can split reinforcing bars in normal and tapered reinforcing bar groups using a split line.
1. Click Edit > Split.
2. Select the reinforcing bar group.
3. Pick two points to indicate where to split the bars.

Once split, each new reinforcing bar group retains the properties of the
original group. For example, if the bars in the original group had hooks
at both ends, bars in the new groups also have hooks at both ends.
Modify the properties of the new groups if needed.

See also Splitting reinforcing bar groups (p. 150)

Combining two reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups into one (p. 150)

Combining two reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups into one

You can combine two single reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups into one. Reinforcing
bars can be combined if their end points are connected, or the bars are parallel and close to each
other. However, in certain cases it is possible to combine reinforcements that are not connected
nor parallel. The combined reinforcement gets the same properties as the first selected bar.
To combine two single reinforcing bars or two reinforcing bar groups into one:
1. Click Edit > Combine.
2. Select the first single bar or bar group to be combined.
3. Select the second single bar or bar group to be combined.

Limitations You cannot combine Tapered N reinforcing bar groups.

See also Splitting reinforcing bar groups (p. 150)

Splitting reinforcing bars in a group (p. 150)

Exploding reinforcement
Before you can modify or remove single bars in a reinforcement component, you need to use
the Explode Component command to ungroup the bars that the reinforcement contains.
To ungroup reinforcing bars:
1. Click Detailing > Component > Explode Component.
2. Select the blue modeling tool symbol (M) on the reinforcement. Tekla Structures ungroups
the reinforcing bars.

150 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
Reinforcement geometry validity
Reinforcement creation or modification can result in invalid reinforcement geometry. For
example, too big bending radius can cause invalid reinforcement geometry.
The invalid geometry is visualized in the model. Tekla Structures displays a warning message,
and draws a thin line between the reinforcement handles to show the invalid geometry. You can
correct the reinforcement geometry by selecting the line and modifying the reinforcement
properties.
You can check the reinforcement geometry validity by running the command Tools >
Diagnose & Repair Model > Dianose Model. The report lists the reinforcements with invalid
geometry.
If a model contains reinforcements with invalid geometry, the reinforcements are not shown in
the drawings. The reinforcements become visible when the geometry is corrected.

Limitations Reinforcement geometry validity check does not work with circular or curved reinforcing bar
groups.

Conceptual reinforcements
Conceptual reinforcements can be created only with Steel Detailing, Reinforced Concrete
Detailing and Engineering configurations.
Engineers or detailers can model conceptual reinforcements that show the geometry of the
reinforcements. Conceptual reinforcements look similar to detailed reinforcements but do not
include the option to perform numbering. When you create a conceptual reinforcement, Tekla
Structures displays a warning message noting that you cannot number the reinforcement.
You can use the Inquire command to check whether the reinforcement is conceptual or
detailed.
Conceptual reinforcements can be converted to detailed reinforcements. You can convert
individual conceptual reinforcements to detailed reinforcements in Full, Precast Concrete
Detailing and Reinforced Concrete Detailing configurations.
Detailed reinforcements can be converted to conceptual reinforcements in Steel Detailing and
Engineering configurations.
Modifying part properties does not automatically convert a detailed reinforcement to a
conceptual one, or vice versa. For example, if you use the Engineering configuration and
modify the model, detailed reinforcements do not convert back to conceptual reinforcements.

See also Converting conceptual reinforcements to detailed reinforcements (p. 151)

Converting conceptual reinforcements to detailed reinforcements

Individual conceptual reinforcements that have been created with Steel Detailing or
Engineering configuration can be converted to detailed reinforcements in Full, Precast
Concrete Detailing, and Reinforced Concrete Detailing configurations.
To convert conceptual reinforcements to detailed reinforcements:
1. Select the reinforcement.
2. Right-click and select Convert to detailed reinforcement.
If you want to convert detailed reinforcements to conceptual reinforcements in Engineering or
Steel Detailing configuration, right-click and select Convert to conceptual reinforcement.

See also Conceptual reinforcements (p. 151)

Customizing reinforcement meshes

You can customize reinforcement meshes using the Select Mesh dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 151

Reinforcement
 1. In the Reinforcement Mesh Properties dialog box, click the Select button next to the
Mesh field to open the Select Mesh dialog box.
2. In the Select Mesh dialog box, select a standard mesh from the mesh catalog and use it
as a basis for the customized mesh.
3. Modify the mesh properties.
4. Enter a name for the mesh in the Selected mesh field. The default name is
CUSTOM_MESH.
5. Click OK to close the Select Mesh dialog box and to save the properties.
6. To save customized mesh properties for later use, enter a name in the Save as field in
the Reinforcement Mesh Properties dialog box and click the Save as button.

To later use saved mesh properties in the Reinforcement Mesh

Properties dialog box, select the name of the mesh properties in the
Load list box and click the Load button.

Custom mesh You can define the following properties for the customized reinforcement meshes:
properties

Longitudinal distance

Cross distance

Longitudinal left overhang

Longitudinal right overhang

Cross left overhang

Cross right overhang

Length

Width

152 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
 Property Description
Spacing method Defines how the mesh bars are distributed. The options are:
• Same distance for all: Use to create meshes with
evenly-spaced bars.
Tekla Structures distributes as many bars as possible for
the length of Length or Width, using the Distance(s)
and Left overhang values.
The Right overhang is calculated automatically, and it
cannot be zero.
• Multiple varying distances: Use to create meshes with
unevenly-spaced bars.
Tekla Structures calculates the Width and Length based
on the Distance(s), the Left overhang and the Right
overhang values.
If you do not change any of the values, the spacing
method changes back to Same distance for all.
Distance(s) Spacing values of longitudinal or crossing bars.
If you select the Multiple varying distances spacing method,
enter all spacing values, separated by spaces. You can use
multiplication to repeat spacing values. For example:
2*150 200 3*400 200 2*150
Left overhang Extensions of longitudinal bars over the outermost crossing
bars.
Right overhang
Extensions of crossing bars over the outermost longitudinal
bars.
Diameter Diameter or size of longitudinal or crossing bars.
You can define multiple diameters for the bars in both
directions. Enter all the diameter values, separated by spaces.
You can use multiplication to repeat diameter values. For
example, 12 2*6 in longitudinal direction and 6 20 2*12
in crossing direction.
Width Length of crossing bars.
Length Length of longitudinal bars.
Grade The steel grade of the bars in the mesh.

See also Reinforcement mesh (p. 161)

Meshes (p. 139)

Defining custom reinforcement components

You can create customized reinforcement details and save them in the component catalog for
later use.

Preconditions Create a concrete part and reinforce it in the way you want the reinforcement to appear in the
custom component. You can create the reinforcement either by exploding and modifying an
existing reinforcement component, or by creating the reinforcing bars individually.

Usage 1. Click Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component....

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 153

Reinforcement
 2. On the Type/Notes tab, select Detail in the Type list box, and enter a name for the
custom reinforcement.
3. Click Next.
4. Select the reinforcing bars to use in the custom reinforcement and click Next.
5. Select the main part and click Next.
6. In DETAIL POSITION, select Main part to position the reinforcement by the main part.
7. Click Finish.
Result
You have now defined a simple custom reinforcement component, which you can use in
locations similar to the one where it was originally created. This component is not parametric
and Tekla Structures does not adjust dimensions to suit any changes in the model. To create a
parametric custom component, see Editing custom components (p. 73).

See also Using a custom component (p. 111)

Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... (p. 117)
Exploding components (p. 66)

3.4 Single bars, bar groups, and meshes

Tekla Structures includes the following tools to create single reinforcing bars, bar groups, and
reinforcement meshes.

Command Icon Description

Reinforcing bar (p. 155) Creates a single reinforcing bar.

Reinforcing bar group Creates a reinforcing bar group.

(p. 156)

Curved reinforcing bar Creates a curved reinforcing bar group.

group (p. 158)

Circular reinforcing bar Creates a circular reinforcing bar group.

group (p. 160)

Reinforcement mesh (p. Creates a reinforcement mesh.

161)

Reinforcement strand Creates prestressed strands.

pattern (p. 163)

Reinforcement splice (p. Joins reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar

166) groups together with reinforcement
splices.
Reinforcement mesh Creates an array of overlapped
array in area (89) reinforcement meshes.

Lifting anchor (80) Creates two lifting anchors or anchor

groups for a concrete part.

154 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
Reinforcing bar

Synopsis This command creates a reinforcing bar.

Preconditions Create the part to reinforce.

Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Description Tekla Structures creates the reinforcing bar using the properties in the Reinforcing bar
properties dialog box. The filename extension of a saved bar properties file is rbr.

Field Description More information

Series and The mark series of the bar. Numbering
Start no reinforcements
Name The user-definable name of the Basic reinforcement
bar. properties (p. 134)
Size The diameter of the bar or a
mark defining it.
Grade The steel grade of the bar.
Bending The internal radius of the bends
radius in the bar.
You can enter a separate value
for each bar bend. Separate the
values with spaces.
Class Used to group reinforcement.
Shape The shape of the hook. Hooks (p. 135)
Angle The angle of the custom hook.
Radius The internal bending radius of
the standard or custom hook.
Length The length of the straight part of
the standard or custom hook.
Cover The distances from the part Concrete cover (p.
thickness on surfaces to the bar on the same 137)
plane plane as the bar.
Cover The distance from the part
thickness from surface to the bar, or bar end,
plane perpendicular to the bar plane.
Start The concrete cover thickness or
leg length at the first end of the
bar.
End The concrete cover thickness or
leg length at the second end of
the bar.
User-defined User-defined reinforcement User-defined
attributes... properties. attributes of
reinforcement (p.
139)

Usage 1. Double-click the Create reinforcing bar icon.

2. Enter or modify the bar properties.
3. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
4. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the bar to the part.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 155

Reinforcement
 5. Pick the starting point of the bar.
6. Pick the other bar reference points.
7. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

See also Reinforcing bar group (p. 156)

Working with reinforcement (p. 140)

Reinforcing bar group

Synopsis This command creates a reinforcing bar group.

Preconditions Create the part to reinforce.

Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Description A reinforcing bar group includes several identical, or very similar, reinforcing bars. You first
define the shape of a single bar, then the direction in which Tekla Structures distributes the
bars.
Tekla Structures creates the reinforcing bar group using the properties in the Reinforcing bar
properties dialog box. The filename extension of a saved bar group properties file is rbg.

Field Description More information

Series and The mark series of the bar. Numbering
Start no reinforcements
Name The user-definable name of the Basic reinforcement
bar. properties (p. 134)
Size The diameter of the bar or a
mark defining it.
Grade The steel grade of the bar.
Bending The internal radius of the bar
radius bends.
You can enter a separate value
for each bar bend. Separate the
values with spaces.
Class Used to group reinforcement.
Shape The shape of the hook. Hooks (p. 135)
Angle The angle of the custom hook.
Radius The internal bending radius of
the standard or custom hook.
Length The length of the straight part of
the standard or custom hook.

156 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
 Field Description More information
Cover The distances from the part Concrete cover (p.
thickness on surfaces to the bar on the same 137)
plane plane as the bar.
Cover The distance from the part
thickness from surface to the bar, or bar end,
plane perpendicular to the bar plane.
Start The concrete cover thickness or
leg length at the first end of the
bar.
End The concrete cover thickness or
leg length at the second end of
the bar.
User-defined User-defined reinforcement User-defined
attributes... properties. attributes of
reinforcement (p.
139)
Creation How to create the bar group. Spacing reinforcing
method etc. bars (p. 138)
Additional Omitting reinforcing
actions bars (p. 138)
Tapered bar group
(p. 157)

Usage 1. Double-click the Create reinforcing bar group icon.

2. Enter or modify the bar group properties.
3. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
4. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the bar group to the part.
5. Pick the bar starting point.
6. Pick the other bar reference points.
7. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
8. Pick the starting point of the bar group.
9. Pick the end point of the bar group.

Tapered bar To create a tapered bar group:

group
1. Double-click the Create reinforcing bar group icon.
2. Enter or modify the bar group properties.
3. On the Group tab, select an option from the Bar group type list box:

Option Description
Normal Not tapered.

Tapered One bar dimension changes linearly in

the group.
Tapered ridge One bar dimension changes linearly.
The dimension is longest in the middle
of the group.
Tapered curved One bar dimension changes along a
curve. The dimension is longest in the
middle of the group.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 157

Reinforcement
 Option Description
Tapered N One bar dimension changes linearly
between N ridges. Enter the number of
ridges in the Number of cross
sections field.
Spiral The reinforcing bars rise in a polygonal
or circular shape along the longitudinal
axis of the part.

1. Click Apply or OK.

2. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the bar group to the part.
3. Pick points to define the shape of the bar at the first cross section. Click the middle mouse
button to finish picking.
4. For the second and subsequent cross sections, pick points to define the shape of the bar.
Click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
If you select the Normal option, you only need to define bar shape and bar distribution length.

If you change the type of a tapered bar group, Tekla Structures adjusts
the number of handles. You can then drag handles to modify the group.

Spiral bar group To create a spiral bar group:

1. Double-click the Create reinforcing bar group icon.
2. Enter or modify the bar group properties.
3. On the Group tab, select Spiral from the Bar group type list box:
4. Click Apply or OK.
5. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the bar group to the part.
6. Pick points to define the shape of the bar at the first cross section. Click the middle mouse
button to finish picking.
7. For the second and subsequent cross sections, pick points to define the shape of the bar.
Click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

See also Reinforcement mesh (p. 161)

Working with reinforcement (p. 140)
Curved reinforcing bar group (p. 158)
Circular reinforcing bar group (p. 160)

Curved reinforcing bar group

Synopsis Creates a group of curved reinforcing bars.

158 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
Preconditions Create the part to reinforce.
Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Description Tekla Structures creates the curved reinforcing bar group using the properties in the
Reinforcing bar properties dialog box. See Reinforcing bar group (p. 156) for more
information on the common properties in this dialog box.

Usage To create a curved bar group:

1. Double-click the Create curved reinforcing bar group icon.
2. Enter or modify the reinforcing bar group properties.
3. Click Apply or OK.
4. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the bar group to the part.
5. Pick three points on an arc to define the curve:

6. Pick two points to indicate the distribution direction of the bars:

See also Working with reinforcement (p. 140)

Reinforcing bar group (p. 156)
Circular reinforcing bar group (p. 160)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 159

Reinforcement
Circular reinforcing bar group

Synopsis Creates a group of circular reinforcing bars.

Preconditions Create the part to reinforce.

Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Description Tekla Structures creates the circular reinforcing bar group using the properties in the
Reinforcing bar properties dialog box. See Reinforcing bar group (p. 156) for more
information on the common properties in this dialog box.

Usage To create a circular bar group:

1. Double-click the Create circular reinforcing bar group icon.
2. Enter or modify the reinforcing bar group properties.
3. Click Apply or OK.
4. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the bar group to the part.
5. Pick three points to define the circlular bars

6. Pick two points to indicate the distribution direction of the bars.

See also Working with reinforcement (p. 140)

160 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
 Reinforcing bar group (p. 156)
Curved reinforcing bar group (p. 158)

Reinforcement mesh

Synopsis This command creates a reinforcement mesh.

Preconditions Create the part to reinforce.

Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Description You can create the following types of reinforcement meshes:

• Rectangular
• Polygonal
• Bent
Tekla Structures creates the reinforcement mesh using the properties in the Reinforcement
Mesh Properties dialog box. The filename extension of a saved mesh properties file is rbm.

Field Description More information

Prefix and The mark series of the mesh. Numbering
Start no reinforcements
Name The user-definable name of the Basic reinforcement
mesh. properties (p. 134)
Mesh Select a mesh from the mesh Meshes (p. 139)
catalog. Customizing
You can also use a customized reinforcement
mesh. meshes (p. 151)
Grade The steel grade of the bars in the Basic reinforcement
mesh. properties (p. 134)
Class Used to group reinforcement.
Mesh type The shape of the mesh. Select Meshes (p. 139)
Polygon, Rectangle, or Bent.
Width
For rectangular meshes, enter
Length
the width and length of the
Bending mesh.
radius
For bent meshes, enter the
bending radius.
Cross bar Defines whether the crossing
location bars are located above or below
the longitudinal bars.
Cut by father Defines whether the polygon or Meshes (p. 139)
part cuts part cuts in the part cut also the
mesh.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 161

Reinforcement
 Field Description More information
Cover The distance from the part Concrete cover (p.
thickness on surface to the main bars on the 137)
plane same plane as the bars.
Cover The distance from the part
thickness from surface to the bar, or bar end,
plane perpendicular to the bar plane.
Cover Thickness of concrete cover or
thickness start leg length from the mesh starting
point.
Cover Thickness of concrete cover or
thickness end leg length at the end point of the
bar. Used for bent meshes.
User-defined User-defined reinforcement User-defined
attributes... properties. attributes of
reinforcement (p.
139)
Hooks tab The shape, angle, radius, and Hooks (p. 135)
length of hooks at the start and
end of the crossing mesh bars.

The properties of standard meshes are defined in the

mesh_database.inp file, located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\
profil folder.

Usage Rectangular
To create a rectangular mesh:
1. Set the work plane parallel to the plane where you want to create the mesh.
2. Double-click the Create reinforcement mesh icon.
3. In the Mesh type list box, select Rectangle.
4. Enter or modify the mesh dimensions and the other properties.
5. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
6. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the mesh to the part.
7. Pick the starting point of the mesh.
8. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the longitudinal bars. Tekla Structures creates the
mesh parallel to the work plane, to the left of the points you picked.
Polygonal
To create a polygonal mesh:
1. Double-click the Create reinforcement mesh icon.
2. In the Mesh type list box, select Polygon.
3. Enter or modify the mesh properties.
4. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
5. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the mesh to the part.
6. Pick the starting point of the mesh.
7. Pick the corner points of the mesh.
8. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
9. Pick two points to indicate the direction of the longitudinal bars.
Bent
To create a bent mesh:

162 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
 1. Double-click the Create reinforcement mesh icon to open the Reinforcement Mesh
Properties dialog box.
2. In the Mesh type list box, select Bent.
3. Enter the bending radius.
4. Enter or modify the other mesh properties.
5. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
6. Click the Create reinforcement mesh icon.
7. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the mesh to the part.
8. Pick points to indicate the bending shape of the crossing bars.
9. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking points.
10. Pick two points to indicate the length and direction of the longitudinal bars.

See also Working with reinforcement (p. 140)

Reinforcement strand pattern

Synopsis This command creates prestressed strands for concrete parts.

Preconditions

Description Tekla Structures creates straight or deflected strands based on the strand profile you indicate
using the properties in the Reinforcing bar properties dialog box.

Field Description More information

Series and The mark series of the bar. Numbering
Start no reinforcements
Name The user-definable name of the Basic reinforcement
bar. properties (p. 134)
Size The diameter of the bar or a
mark defining it.
Grade The steel grade of the bar.
Bending The internal radius of the bar
radius bends.
Class Used to group reinforcement.
Pull per strand The pull per strand (kN).
Number of Defines the number of cross
cross sections sections of the strand pattern.
User-defined User-defined reinforcement User-defined
attributes... properties. attributes of
reinforcement (p.
139)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 163

Reinforcement
 Field Description More information
Debonded Enter the strand number in this Debonding strands
strands field. The strand number is the (p. 165)
picking order number of the
strand.
From start Enter the length of the
debonding. If you select the
Middle to start
Symmetry checkbox, values in
Middle to end fields From start and From
From end Middle to start are copied to
From end and Middle to end
fields.
Symmetry Defines if the end and start
lengths are symmetrical.

Usage To create prestressed strands for a concrete part:

1. Double-click the Create reinforcement strand pattern icon.
2. Enter or modify the strand properties.
3. In the Number of cross sections field, enter a number based on the strand profile. For
example:

Number of
Strand profile patterns
1

4. Define the lenghts of the debonding zones.

5. Click Apply or OK.
6. Click the Create reinforcement strand pattern icon.
7. Pick the part you are creating strands for.
8. Pick points to position the strands (for example, at the end of a part):
The points you pick define the first cross section. Click the middle mouse button to finish
picking.

164 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
 9. If you chose to create a single cross section, pick two points to define the length of the
strands. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

10. If you chose to create two or more cross sections, for each cross section, pick points to
indicate the strand positions. Pick the strand positions in the same order as for the first
cross section. After each cross section, click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

Debonding To debond strands:

strands
1. Double-click the Create reinforcement strand pattern icon.
2. On the Debonding tab, enter the debonding properties.
3. Click Add button to create a new row in the table.
4. Enter the strand numbers in the Debonded strands field. The strand number is the picking
order number of the strand:
• To set the same values for all the strands, enter all the strand numbers, separated by a
space (e.g. 1 2 3 4).
• To set separate values for each strand, click Add to add a new row, then enter the
strand number in the Debonded strands field.
5. Define the debonded lengths:
• To set symmetrical lengths, select the End lengths = start lengths checkbox and only
enter values in the From start or Middle to start fields. Debonding lengths:

6. Click Modify and Apply.

Tekla Structures displays the debonded section of the strand in red in rendered views, or as
a broken line in wire frame views.

Debonded strands appear as broken lines in drawings.

See also Working with reinforcement (p. 140)

Reinforcing bar group (p. 156)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 165

Reinforcement
Reinforcement splice
This command joins reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups together with reinforcement
splices.

Preconditions Create the reinforcing bars or bar groups to join. There can be a gap between them.

Description Tekla Structures creates the reinforcement splice using the current properties in the
Reinforcement Splice Properties dialog box. The filename extension of a saved splice
properties file is rsp.

Field Description More information

Joint type The type of the splice. The options are: Lap left creates the lap to
the direction of the first
• Lap right
reinforcing bar or bar
• Lap left group selected, Lap right
• Lap both to the direction of the
second.
• Muff joint
Lap both centers the lap
• Welded joint
between the bars or bar
groups.
Lap length The length of the lap joint.
Offset The offset of the splice center point
from the point where the bars originally
met.
Bar positions Defines whether the lapping bars are on
top of each other or parallel to each
other.

Usage 1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcement Splice....
2. Enter or modify the splice properties.
3. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
4. Click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Reinforcement Splice.
5. Select the first reinforcing bar or bar group.
6. Select the second reinforcing bar or bar group.
Tekla Structures indicates reinforcement splices in the model using blue splice symbols:

If needed, you can move the splice along reinforcing bars.

To move the splice:
1. Select the splice symbol.
2. Right-click and select Move.
3. Pick an origin and a destination point for the splice.

166 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcement
4 Reinforcing bar bending
types

Tekla Structures recognizes different reinforcing bar bending shapes and assigns bending type
identifiers to them. The table below lists these reinforcing bar bending types.
If Tekla Structures does not recognize the shape of a reinforcing bar, it assigns the UNKNOWN
bending type to it.
The bending type identifiers in the table below are internal, hard-coded types of Tekla
Structures. The leg dimensions (D1, D2, etc.) and bending angles (A1, A2, etc.) of reinforcing
bars are internal dimensions and angles. You can map internal types, for example, to country-
or project-specific types, and internal dimensions and angles to specific template attributes.
You do this in the rebar_schedule_config.inp file. See Reinforcement in templates
(p. 188).
Reinforcing bar bending dimensions are calculated so that the leg dimensions (D1, D2, etc.)
follow the outer edge, or the edge extension, of the reinforcing bar. The total length is
calculated according to the center line of the reinforcing bar.
The magenta points in the images represent the points you pick in the model when you create
reinforcing bars.

Type Image
1

2_1

Requires standard bending radius.

2_2

Non-standard bending radius.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 167

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
3_1

3_2

4_2

4_3

4_4

5_1

5_2

168 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
5_3

6_1

6_2

Requires 180 degree hook.

10

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 169

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
11

D1 = Radius from center of circle to the center line of reinforcing

bar.
12

13

Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends (i.e. model D1 and
D5 using 90 degree hooks).
14

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

14_2

170 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
14_3

14_4

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

14_5

Recognized when the start point and end point are in the same
location and no hooks are used.
If XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION is set to
FALSE, reinforcing bars with hooks (types 14 and 48) are recognized
as 14_5.
15

Requires hooks at both ends.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 171

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
16_1

16_2

17

18

19

20_1

172 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
20_2

21

22

23

24

25

26

Requires 180 degree hooks at both ends.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 173

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
27

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

28

Requires 180 degree hooks at both ends.

29

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

29_2

29_3

29_4

174 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
29_5

30

Requires 180 degree hooks at both ends.

31

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

32

Requires 180 degree hooks at both ends.

32_2

33

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 175

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
34

35

Requires 180 degree hook.

36

Requires 180 degree hook.

36_2

Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends.

36_3

Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends.

176 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
37

Requires 180 degree hook.

38

Requires 180 degree hook at one end and 90 degree hook at the
other end.
38_2

39

40

Requires 180 degree hooks at both ends.

41

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

42

Requires 180 degree hooks at both ends.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 177

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
43

43_2

44

Requires hooks at both ends.

44_2

Requires 180 degree hooks at both ends.

45

Requires hooks at both ends.

178 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
45_2

Requires 180 hooks at both ends.

46

Requires hooks at both ends.

47

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

48

Requires hooks at both ends.

48_2

Requires hooks at both ends.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 179

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
48_3

49

D1 = Reinforcing bar center line diameter.

49_2

50

Requires hooks at both ends.

51

Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

180 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
52

Requires hooks at both ends.

53

Requires hooks at both ends.

54

Requires hooks at both ends.

55

56

57

58

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 181

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
59

60

61

Requires hooks at both ends.

61_2

Recognized if
XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION is set to
FALSE.
61_3

Requires hooks at both ends.

62

Requires hook.

182 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
63

Requires hook.
64

Requires hooks at both ends.

64_2

Recognized if
XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION is set to
FALSE.
65

Requires hooks at both ends.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 183

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
65_2

Recognized if
XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION is set to
FALSE.
66

67

67_2

68

184 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
69_1

69_2

70_1

70_2

71

72

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 185

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
73_1

73_2

73_3

74

75_1

186 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
75_2

76

77

78

79_1

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 187

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Type Image
79_2

80

UNKNOWN For example:

4.1 Reinforcement in templates

Audience This topic is aimed at Tekla Structures users who need to localize reinforcing bar bending types
or to create templates for reinforcing bar bending schedules.

Reinforcement You can show dimensions, bending angles, and bending types of reinforcing bars in drawings
templates and reports by including reinforcement-specific attributes, such as DIM_A, ANG_S, SHAPE, and
SHAPE_INTERNAL, in template fields. For more information on creating templates, see the
Template Editor (TplEd) online help.

Mapping Use the rebar_schedule_config.inp file in the ..\Tekla

dimensions Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder to
map:
• Tekla Structures internal reinforcing bar dimensions and angles with specific template
attributes
• Tekla Structures internal reinforcing bar bending types with specific bending types
These mappings are environment-specific by default. You can modify them to suit your
company or project needs.
You can use equations, functions, and if statements to calculate the dimensions and angles you
need to show.

188 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
 Use any standard text editor (for example, Notepad) to edit the
rebar_schedule_config.inp file.

Examples The following example of the rebar_schedule_config.inp file maps the internal
bending type 5_1 to the bending type identifier E, and the leg dimensions and bending angles to
specific template attributes:

rebar_schedule_config.inp (Example 1)
BEND_TYPE_5_1[1]="E"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[3]="DIM_B=D5"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[4]="DIM_C=D2"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[5]="DIM_TD=TD"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[6]="ANG_U=A1"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[7]="ANG_V=A2"

With this mapping, the internal bending type 6_2 becomes XY, and the template attributes
DIM_B and DIM_C will show the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the second leg D2, and
DIM_E and DIM_F the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the fourth leg D4:

rebar_schedule_config.inp (Example 2)
BEND_TYPE_6_2[1]="XY"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[3]="DIM_B=D2*COS(A2*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[4]="DIM_C=D2*SIN(A2*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[5]="DIM_D=D3"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[6]="DIM_E=D4*COS(A1*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[7]="DIM_F=D4*SIN(A1*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[8]="DIM_G=D5"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[9]="DIM_TD=TD"

The following example maps the internal bending type 4 to the bending type identifier A if the
dimensions D1 and D3 are the same. Otherwise it maps 4 to B:

rebar_schedule_config.inp (Example 3)
BEND_TYPE_4[1]=if (D1==D3) then ("A")
else ("B") endif
BEND_TYPE_4[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_4[3]="DIM_B=D2"
BEND_TYPE_4[4]="DIM_C=D3"
BEND_TYPE_4[5]="DIM_TD=TD"

If Tekla Structures does not recognize a reinforcing bar bending shape, it uses the internal
bending type UNKNOWN for it. In the rebar_schedule_config.inp file you can also
define how unknown bending types appear in drawings and reports. For example, you may just
want to use the bending type identifier ???, and list all leg dimensions and bending angles:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 189

Reinforcing bar bending types
 rebar_schedule_config.inp (Example 4)
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[1]="???"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[3]="DIM_B=D2"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[4]="DIM_C=D3"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[5]="DIM_D=D4"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[6]="DIM_E=D5"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[7]="DIM_F=D6"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[8]="ANG_S=A1"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[9]="ANG_T=A2"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[10]="ANG_U=A3"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[11]="ANG_V=A4"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[12]="DIM_TD=TD"

See also DIM_A ... DIM_G, DIM_H1, DIM_H2, DIM_I, DIM_J, DIM_K1, DIM_K2, DIM_O,
DIM_R, DIM_R_ALL, DIM_TD, DIM_X, DIM_Y
ANG_S, ANG_T, ANG_U, ANG_V
SHAPE
SHAPE_INTERNAL
Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 167)

190 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Reinforcing bar bending types
 5 User-defined reinforcing
bar bending shapes

You can define your own custom reinforcing bar bending shapes with the Rebar shape
manager tool, and thus increase the amount of recognised reinforcing bar shapes. Custom
bending shapes are useful when Tekla Structures does not recognize a reinforcing bar bending
shape and assigns it UNKNOWN bending type.
The custom bending shapes can be used in bending schedules and pull-out pictures in the same
way as the predefined, Tekla Structures internal bending shapes.
You can also import and export the custom bending shapes.
When you define your custom shapes, an XML file called RebarShapeRules.xml is
created in the currect model folder.
By default, Tekla Structures installation package already contains an XML file called
RebarShapeRules.xml. The file is located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder, and it
contains the most typical reinforcing bar shapes of your environment. These catalog shapes can
be appended with your custom shapes.

Defining your own custom bending shapes is meant for advanced users.

See also Defining your own reinforcing bar bending shapes (p. 191)

5.1 Defining your own reinforcing bar bending

shapes
To define your own reinforcing bar bending shape:
1. Set the advanced option XS_USE_USER_DEFINED_REBARSHAPERULES to TRUE to
enable the user-defined bending shape recognition.
2. Select reinforcing bars in the model.
3. Go to Tools > Macros..., and select RebarShapeManager.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 191

User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes
 4. Click Run.
Rebar shape manager opens, and lists the selected reinforcing bars in the Model
rebars list. The Model rebars list shows the ID number and the bending shape code of
the reinforcing bars.
The Catalog shapes list shows the shapes that exist in the RebarShapeRules.xml
file.

Alternatively, you can first open Rebar shape manager and then select
reinforcing bars in the model.
Click Get selected to add the reinforcing bars to the Model rebars list.

5. Select one unknown shape from the Model rebars list.

6. Define the needed bending shape information.
• Use the Shape code box to enter a shape code for an unknown shape.
• Bending shape rules lists the rules for the bending shape. You can add or a delete a
rule by clicking the Add and Delete buttons. If you modify the Bending shape
rules, the Reset button restores the original rules.
• Select the Require hooks check box if you want to define different shape codes for
two bars that otherwise have exactly the same geometry, but the other bar has hooks
and the other one does not have hooks. By default, the hooks are not required and
the check box is not selected.
• Use Bending schedule fields to define the content for a bending schedule. Right-
click a field to select the shape properties, or to enter a formula.
• If you have already defined the shape code for the selected reinforcing bar but have
modified the shape code, bending shape rules or the bending schedule field
definitions, click Update to update the existing shape code definition.

The names of the Bending schedule fields (A, B, and so on) are used in
templates and reports. To make sure that also old reports work corrcetly,
we recommend that you use the same DIM_XX fields as used in the
rebar_schedule_config.inp file.

7. When you have finished defining the new shape, click Add to add the bending shape
definition to the RebarShapeRules.xml file.

To enable the Add button you need to change the bending shape rule,
enter a shape code or require the hooks.

8. Click Save to save the RebarShapeRules.xml file.

By default, the file is located in the current model folder.
Next time you create, for example, a bending schedule, Tekla Structures uses the
updated bending shape information and recognizes the added bending shape and assigns
a correct bending shape code to it.

Modeling When the reinforcing bar shape is being defined, the start or end of the modeling direction is
direction always sorted based on the bending angles and/or leg lengths. This means that the shape code
will be the same regardless of the modeling direction.
Bending radius is not taken into consideration in the sorting, and therefore it cannot be trusted
that radius 1 is always less than radius 2 or vice versa.

192 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes
See also User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes (p. 191)
Defining rules for reinforcing bar bending shapes manually (p. 193)
XS_USE_USER_DEFINED_REBARSHAPERULES

5.2 Defining rules for reinforcing bar bending shapes

manually
In some cases, the reinforcing bar bending shape rules defined by Rebar shape manager are
not sufficient to distinguish certain bending shapes. In such situations, you can add new
bending shape rules manually.
To define a reinforcing bar bending shape rule manually:
1. Click the Add button next to the Bending shape rules list.
The New bending rule dialog box opens.
2. Select the options from the lists to define the new rule.
The content of the lists depends on the shape and the bendings of the reinforcing bar.
3. Click OK to add the new rule to the Bending shape rules list.
The OK button is enabled only when the rule is valid.

Defining additional rules for bending shapes is meant for advanced

users.

See also User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes (p. 191)

Reinforcing bar bending shape rule settings

Use the New bending rule dialog box to manually define rules for reinforcing bar bending
shapes.

All the rule options are available in the New bending rule dialog box,
even though only certain selections are valid, depending on the type of
the conditions used.
The left and right condition of a rule need to be of the same type.

Option Description
Angle Bending angle between the legs.
Bending angle is always between 0 and +180
degrees. The angle cannot be negative.
Twist angle Angle around the reinforcing bar center axis
before the bar is bent.
For flat bars the twist angle is either 0 or
+180 degrees. For other bars the twist angle
is between -180 and +180 degrees.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 193

User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes
 Option Description
Radius Bending radius of the bending.
Radius * means that the same radius is
used in all bendings.
Rule Radius * = Radius 1 means that
all the bendings have equal radius.
Straight length Straight length between the start and the end
of adjacent bendings.
The field is available when there is no
straight part, for example, Straight
length 2 = 0.
Leg length Length of the leg.
Leg distance from leg Distance from the furthermost outer corner
of a leg perpendicular to another leg.
Leg Leg direction as a vector value.
Standard radius Standard minimum bending radius.
The bending radius depends on the size and
the grade of the bar.
Bar diameter Diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Constant angle Constant value of the angle.
Enter the value in the right-most box.
Constant radius Constant value of the radius.
Enter the value in the right-most box.

Angles

Twist angle

Radiuses

194 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes
 Straight length

Leg length

Legs

See also User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes (p. 191)

Defining your own reinforcing bar bending shapes (p. 191)
Defining rules for reinforcing bar bending shapes manually (p. 193)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 195

User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes
Index

a bending shapes
defining................................................................191
reinforcing bars....................................................191
acos.............................................................................. 93 bending types
adaptivity defining................................................................191
reinforcement ...................................................... 143 reinforcing bars....................................................191
add bent mesh
anchor rod ............................................................. 25 adding points .......................................................148
base plate.............................................................. 25 removing points ...................................................149
beam to column connection .................................. 26 bind to plane .................................................................79
adding points binding using magnetic planes .....................................84
bent mesh ........................................................... 148 bolt assemblies
reinforcement ...................................................... 148 defining in connections..........................................41
reinforcing bar ..................................................... 148 bolts
reinforcing bar group ........................................... 148 bolt group orientation.............................................36
anchor rods bolt group pattern ..................................................37
add ........................................................................ 25 bolt position ...........................................................37
anchoring hooks ......................................................... 135 bolt spacing ...........................................................36
asin............................................................................... 93 defining........................................................... 33, 35
assemblies deleting..................................................................40
defining.................................................................. 33 edge distance ........................................................37
atan .............................................................................. 93 increasing bolt length ............................................35
atan2 ............................................................................ 93 number of ..............................................................36
attaching overview of properties on the bolts tab..................33
reinforcement to parts ......................................... 141 Boundary plane ..........................................................125
AutoConnection box plane ....................................................................119
using...................................................................... 42 browser.......................................................................124
automatic distances.................................................... 130
automatic properties..................................................... 14
ave................................................................................ 90
c
b cast-in-place ............................. 145, 147, 148, 149, 150
cast-in-situ ................................ 145, 147, 148, 149, 150
ceil ................................................................................90
base plate CIP............................................ 145, 147, 148, 149, 150
add ........................................................................ 25 collision plane .............................................................119
beam profiles columns
selecting ................................................................ 30 connect to beam....................................................26
beams combining
connect to column ................................................. 26 reinforcing bar groups .........................................150
bending radius............................................................ 134 reinforcing bars....................................................150
component catalog .......................................................17
component design
checking ................................................................16

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 196

components
concepts................................................................ 10 d
conceptual............................................................. 27
copying.................................................................. 22 default properties..........................................................14
creating view ......................................................... 27 default values
detailed.................................................................. 27 setting with the joints.def file .................................46
dialog box.............................................................. 11 defining
publish in catalog .................................................. 22 bending shapes ...................................................191
symbols ................................................................. 19 bending types ......................................................191
thumbnails............................................................. 21 Design tab ....................................................................16
types...................................................................... 10 Design type tab.............................................................16
using excel ............................................................ 58 detailed components ............................................. 27, 28
viewing .................................................................. 27 detailed reinforcement ................................................151
conceptual components .........................................27, 28 distance ........................................................................79
conceptual reinforcement ........................................... 151 reference distance.................................................81
concrete cover............................................................ 137 distance variable.........................................................128
connect double...........................................................................91
beam to column..................................................... 26
connection library, see component catalog .................. 17
Connection plane ....................................................... 125 e
connections
beam to column..................................................... 26
defining bolt assemblies........................................ 41 edge distance
construction planes ...................................................... 84 bolts.......................................................................37
copying end end plane.............................................................119
components........................................................... 22 Excel.............................................................................59
cos................................................................................ 93 excel
cosh.............................................................................. 93 example.................................................................59
creating using for components ............................................58
distance............................................................... 128 using with custom components ...........................114
custom component Excel.vb ........................................................................59
settings................................................................ 127 exp................................................................................89
custom component browser ....................................... 124 exploding
custom component settings........................................ 127 reinforcement ......................................................150
custom component wizard............................................ 66 exploding components..................................................66
custom components
browser ................................................................. 76
defining..........................................................66, 117
f
editor ..................................................................... 74
exporting and importing....................................... 112 fabs...............................................................................89
interface .............................................................. 105 fAD() .............................................................................93
password............................................................. 113 find................................................................................91
properties .............................................................. 72 floor...............................................................................90
protecting ............................................................ 113 formulae........................................................................86
tips on working with............................................. 115 fP()................................................................................88
types...................................................................... 70 functions for equations .................................................87
updating ................................................................ 73
using.................................................................... 111
custom connections...................................................... 66 g
custom details .............................................................. 66
custom reinforcement meshes ................................... 151
general tab....................................................................15
customizing
reinforcement ..............................................151, 153

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 197

geometry
reinforcement.......................................................151 m
getat..............................................................................91
grouping magnetic planes............................................................84
mesh....................................................................147 match ............................................................................91
reinforcement.......................................................147 materials
reinforcing bar group ...........................................147 defining ..................................................................32
gusset plane ...............................................................119 max ...............................................................................90
mesh ...........................................................................161
h bent......................................................................161
grouping...............................................................147
polygonal .............................................................161
handles ungrouping...........................................................145
of reinforcement...................................................142 min ................................................................................90
holes mod ...............................................................................89
creating..................................................................35 model browser ............................................................124
hypot .............................................................................89 modeling tips
working with custom components........................115

i modifying
reinforcement.......................................................141
moving
reinforcement splice.............................................166
In...................................................................................89
indicating component status with Excel design ............62
int..................................................................................91 n
j n! ...................................................................................89

joints.def
about......................................................................47
o
bolt and part properties..........................................51
bolt properties in clip angle connections................50 omitting reinforcing bars..............................................138
bolt properties in diagonal connections .................51 Outline plane...............................................................125
bolt properties in end plate connections ................50
bolt properties in gusset connections ....................50
bolt properties in shear plate connections .............50 p
connections that use joints.def ..............................48
defining bolt diameter and number of rows ...........50 parameters....................................................................85
defining global defaults..........................................48 part position number .....................................................31
entering values ......................................................48 parts
example of how Tekla Structures uses..................57 defining ..................................................................29
how it works...........................................................47 dialog box tabs.......................................................29
interpreting.............................................................47 dimensioning..........................................................30
part position number ..............................................31
l setting default prefix and start number ..................31
passwords
custom component ..............................................113
length ............................................................................91 plane types..................................................................125
log .................................................................................89 plates
defining ..................................................................29
dimensioning..........................................................30

198 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

pow............................................................................... 89 reinforcing bar group ..................................................156
prestressed strands adding points .......................................................148
debonding ........................................................... 163 circular.................................................................160
properties combining ............................................................150
automatic............................................................... 14 curved..................................................................158
default ................................................................... 14 grouping ..............................................................147
system default ....................................................... 14 removing points ...................................................149
publish in catalog.......................................................... 22 ungrouping ..........................................................145
reinforcing bar groups

r splitting ................................................................150
reinforcing bars
adding points .......................................................148
rebar ........................................................................... 155 bending types ......................................................167
bending types...................................................... 167 combining ............................................................150
rebar group................................................................. 156 removing points ...................................................149
rebar mesh ................................................................. 161 removing points
reference distances .................................................... 129 bent mesh............................................................149
reference function......................................................... 88 reinforcement ......................................................149
reinforcement reinforcing bar .....................................................149
adaptivity ............................................................. 143 reinforcing bar group ...........................................149
adding points....................................................... 148 reports
basic properties................................................... 134 on reinforcement .................................................188
bending radius..................................................... 134 round ............................................................................89
bending types...................................................... 134 rules
conceptual........................................................... 151 reinforcing bar bending shape.............................193
customizing ......................................................... 153
defining as custom components.......................... 153
detailed................................................................ 151
s
exploding............................................................. 150
geometry ............................................................. 151 seam.............................................................................70
grouping .............................................................. 147 setat..............................................................................91
hooks................................................................... 135 setting up Excel files.....................................................59
in templates......................................................... 188 sin .................................................................................93
invalid geometry .................................................. 151 sinh ...............................................................................93
modifying............................................................. 141 sketch browser ...........................................................124
omitting bars........................................................ 138 slotted holes
prestressed strands............................................. 163 defining..................................................................39
removing points................................................... 149 spacing reinforcing bars .............................................138
spacing................................................................ 138 spiral reinforcing bar groups .......................................156
splice ................................................................... 166 splice ..........................................................................166
strands ................................................................ 163 splitting
ungrouping .......................................................... 145 reinforcing bar groups .........................................150
user-defined attributes ........................................ 139 reinforcing bars in a group...................................150
reinforcement mesh.................................................... 161 sqave ............................................................................90
customizing ......................................................... 151 sqrt................................................................................89
reinforcement splice sqsum ...........................................................................90
moving................................................................. 166 strand pattern
reinforcing bar ............................................................ 155 reinforcement ......................................................163
bending shapes................................................... 191 string.............................................................................91
bending types...................................................... 191 sum...............................................................................90
reinforcing bar bending shape surface treatment
rules .................................................................... 193 in custom components ........................................105

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 199

system default properties..............................................14 updating
custom components...............................................73

t user-defined reinforcement attributes .........................139

using ASCII files with custom component...................114
using Excel with custom components .........................114
tan.................................................................................93
tanh...............................................................................93
tapered reinforcing bar groups....................................156
v
thumbnail images..........................................................21
variables............................................................... 78, 120

u viewing
components ...........................................................27

ungrouping
mesh....................................................................145
w
reinforcement.......................................................145
reinforcing bar group ...........................................145 welds
up direction ...................................................................13 defining ........................................................... 33, 41

200 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

 Tekla Structures
Drawing Guide

Product version 17.0

December 2010

© 2010 Tekla Corporation

© 2010 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this
Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain
warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines
permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information
set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License
Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not
guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make
changes and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and
criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xroad, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product
and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a
third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party
and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights reserved.
EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.
XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.
DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights
reserved.
FlexNet Copyright © 2010 Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. All Rights Reserved. This product
contains proprietary and confidential technology, information and creative works owned by Flexera Software, Inc.
and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. and their respective licensors, if any. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display,
modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior
express written permission of Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. is strictly prohibited. Except where
expressly provided by Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. in writing, possession of this technology
shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc.
intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
The software is protected by U.S. Patent Nos. 7,302,368 and 7,617,076. Also elements of the software described in
this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including
U.S. patent applications 2004267695, 2005285881, 20060004841, 20060136398, 20080189084, and 20090189887.
Conventions used in this guide
Typographical The following typographical conventions are used in this guide:
conventions

Font Usage
Bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. This font
is used, for example, for window and dialog box titles, box and
button names, and list items.
Italic bold New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context
for the first time.
Monospace Extracts of program code, HTML, or other material that you would
normally edit in a text editor, appear in monospaced font.
This font is also used for file names and folder paths, and for any
text that you should type yourself.

Noteboxes The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:

A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing

things.

A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can
also point you to other information in this guide that you might find
useful.

You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this
one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your
time.

This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that

is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 3
Contents

Conventions used in this guide ........................................................................................................................... 3

1 Introduction to drawings ........................................................................ 17

1.1 Main features in drawings..................................................................................................................... 17
1.2 Screen layout........................................................................................................................................ 18
1.3 Drawing contents .................................................................................................................................. 19
Drawing layout and views ................................................................................................................ 19
Drawing objects................................................................................................................................ 20
1.4 Basic principles of drawings ................................................................................................................. 21
Integrated drawings.......................................................................................................................... 22
How drawings are updated .............................................................................................................. 22
Drawing associativity........................................................................................................................ 23
Associativity symbol .................................................................................................................. 23
Three levels of modifying drawings.................................................................................................. 24

2 Creating drawings ................................................................................... 27

2.1 Drawing types ....................................................................................................................................... 27
General arrangement drawings........................................................................................................ 27
Example: Foundation plan ......................................................................................................... 28
Example: Slab plan ................................................................................................................... 28
Example: Framing plan ............................................................................................................. 29
Example: Deck plan .................................................................................................................. 30
Example: Erection elevation drawing ........................................................................................ 31
Example: 3D isometric drawing ................................................................................................. 32
Example: Anchor bolt plan ........................................................................................................ 33
Single-part drawings ........................................................................................................................ 34
Example: Anchor bolt ................................................................................................................ 34
Example: Embed ....................................................................................................................... 35
Example: Plate .......................................................................................................................... 36
Assembly drawings .......................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Beam ......................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Stairs ......................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Rail ............................................................................................................................ 41
Example: Nested assembly ....................................................................................................... 42
Cast unit drawings............................................................................................................................ 44
Example: Beam ......................................................................................................................... 44

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 4
 Example: Column ...................................................................................................................... 45
Example: Stairs ......................................................................................................................... 46
Multidrawings ................................................................................................................................... 47
2.2 Before creating drawings ...................................................................................................................... 48
2.3 Master Drawing Catalog ....................................................................................................................... 49
Master drawing types ....................................................................................................................... 50
Cloning templates ...................................................................................................................... 50
Saved settings ........................................................................................................................... 50
Rule sets ................................................................................................................................... 51
Wizards ..................................................................................................................................... 52
Searching for master drawings ........................................................................................................ 52
2.4 Cloning drawings .................................................................................................................................. 53
Creating drawings using cloning templates...................................................................................... 54
Using cloning templates from other models .............................................................................. 54
Cloning from the Drawing List .......................................................................................................... 55
Example: Cloning a general arrangement drawing ................................................................... 55
View-specific dimension cloning ...................................................................................................... 57
Cloning using drawing templates in template library........................................................................ 58
Cloned objects ................................................................................................................................. 58
Checking and modifying cloned drawings........................................................................................ 59
Refreshing drawing associativity...................................................................................................... 60
2.5 Creating drawings using saved settings ............................................................................................... 60
Creating general arrangement drawings.......................................................................................... 60
Creating single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.................................................................... 61
2.6 Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards ....................................................................................... 62
2.7 Creating anchor bolt plans.................................................................................................................... 63
Objects included in the anchor bolt plan .......................................................................................... 64
Defining the included parts using drawing filters.............................................................................. 64
Including assemblies in anchor bolt plans........................................................................................ 65
2.8 Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands ............................................................. 65
Creating general arrangement drawings.......................................................................................... 66
Creating single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings...................................................................... 66
Creating multidrawings..................................................................................................................... 67
Creating empty multidrawings and linking or copying views ..................................................... 67
Creating multidrawings of selected drawings ............................................................................ 68
Creating multidrawings of selected parts ................................................................................... 68
2.9 Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part............................................................................... 69
Creating multiple drawing sheets using wizards .............................................................................. 69
Creating multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties............................................................. 69

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 5
3 Finding and opening drawings .............................................................. 71
3.1 Opening the Drawing List...................................................................................................................... 72
3.2 What is displayed in the Drawing List ................................................................................................... 72
3.3 Drawing status flags.............................................................................................................................. 73
How to read the drawing status information ..................................................................................... 74
3.4 Modifying Drawing List contents ........................................................................................................... 75
3.5 Searching drawings and saving the search results............................................................................... 76
3.6 Selecting drawings in the Drawing List ................................................................................................. 76
3.7 Checking whether parts have drawings ................................................................................................ 76
3.8 Opening drawings from the model ........................................................................................................ 77
3.9 Opening a new drawing when a drawing is already open..................................................................... 77

4 Editing drawings ..................................................................................... 79

4.1 Renaming drawings .............................................................................................................................. 79
4.2 Giving titles to drawings ........................................................................................................................ 80
4.3 Drawing views....................................................................................................................................... 80
Adding views in drawings ................................................................................................................. 81
Creating a detail view ................................................................................................................ 81
Creating a section view .............................................................................................................. 83
Creating a curved section view .................................................................................................. 84
Creating additional views of parts .............................................................................................. 85
Creating a view of an entire model view .................................................................................... 86
Creating a view of a selected area in a model view ................................................................... 87
Creating a view of a selected area in a drawing view ................................................................ 87
Creating a view for a reinforcement mesh ................................................................................. 88
Adding single-part views in assembly drawings ........................................................................ 89
Copying drawing views from another drawing.................................................................................. 89
Moving views to another drawing ..................................................................................................... 90
Linking views from another drawing ................................................................................................. 92
Changing drawing views .................................................................................................................. 92
Resizing drawing views ............................................................................................................. 92
Resizing the drawing view boundary ......................................................................................... 93
Moving drawing views ................................................................................................................ 94
Aligning views ............................................................................................................................ 95
Rotating drawing views .............................................................................................................. 96
Arranging drawing views ............................................................................................................ 96
Modifying drawing view properties ............................................................................................. 96
Modifying section properties ...................................................................................................... 97
Modifying detail properties ......................................................................................................... 98

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
4.4 Dimensions ........................................................................................................................................... 98
Adding dimensions........................................................................................................................... 99
Adding manual dimensions ....................................................................................................... 99
Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System .................................................... 103
Adding tags to dimensions ...................................................................................................... 104
Adding dual dimensions manually ........................................................................................... 107
Recreating dimensions for all parts ......................................................................................... 108
Adding predefined reinforcement dimensions ......................................................................... 109
Adding dimension (distribution) lines to reinforcing bars ......................................................... 110
Dimensioning spiral stirrup reinforcement groups ................................................................... 111
Dimensioning center of gravity ................................................................................................ 113
Semi-automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings .................................................. 115
Adding semi-automatic dimensions ......................................................................................... 115
Example: Combining dimensions ............................................................................................ 116
Editing dimensions ......................................................................................................................... 119
Moving the end of the dimension line ...................................................................................... 120
Combining dimension lines ..................................................................................................... 120
Linking perpendicular dimension lines ..................................................................................... 121
Adding dimension points ......................................................................................................... 122
Adding closing dimensions ...................................................................................................... 122
Setting new dimension start point ........................................................................................... 123
Placing dimension texts outside dimensions ........................................................................... 124
Showing plate side marks ....................................................................................................... 125
Adding dimension points in anchor bolt plans ......................................................................... 126
Modifying dimension properties ............................................................................................... 126
Checking dimension point validity .................................................................................................. 127
4.5 Associative annotation objects ........................................................................................................... 127
Adding part marks .......................................................................................................................... 128
Adding level marks......................................................................................................................... 128
Adding associative notes ............................................................................................................... 129
Modifying associative annotation object properties........................................................................ 130
Updating marks .............................................................................................................................. 130
Change symbols ............................................................................................................................ 131
Removing change symbols ..................................................................................................... 131
Showing change symbols in printed drawings ......................................................................... 132
Merging marks ............................................................................................................................... 132
Merging reinforcement marks .................................................................................................. 133
Moving the mark leader line base point ......................................................................................... 133
4.6 Independent annotation objects.......................................................................................................... 133
Adding text ..................................................................................................................................... 133
Using superscript in text .......................................................................................................... 134
Adding links to text files.................................................................................................................. 135

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 7
 Adding links to other drawings ....................................................................................................... 135
Adding hyperlinks ........................................................................................................................... 136
Adding links to DWG and DXF files................................................................................................ 137
Adding revision marks .................................................................................................................... 137
Modifying the properties of independent annotation objects .......................................................... 138
4.7 Building objects................................................................................................................................... 138
Modifying building objects .............................................................................................................. 139
Shortening parts view by view........................................................................................................ 140
Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools....................................................................... 141
Showing a single reinforcing bar in a group ................................................................................... 141
Adjusting the location of a single reinforcing bar ..................................................................... 142
Showing layer information on reinforcing bars ............................................................................... 142
4.8 Edge chamfers in drawings................................................................................................................. 143
Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing.......................................................................................... 143
Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers .................................................................. 144
Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually ................................................................... 145
Creating edge chamfer marks ........................................................................................................ 145
Example: Edge chamfers ............................................................................................................... 146
4.9 Welds in drawings............................................................................................................................... 147
Weld concepts................................................................................................................................ 147
Example: Model welds in drawings ................................................................................................ 148
Adding weld marks ......................................................................................................................... 151
Example: Weld mark added in a drawing....................................................................................... 152
Merging weld marks ....................................................................................................................... 153
4.10 Symbols in drawings ........................................................................................................................... 154
Symbol Files browser ..................................................................................................................... 155
Viewing and modifying the symbol file contents ...................................................................... 155
Creating a new symbol file ....................................................................................................... 156
Changing the symbol file in use ............................................................................................... 156
Adding symbols in drawings........................................................................................................... 156
Modifying symbol properties........................................................................................................... 157
4.11 Additional drawing objects .................................................................................................................. 157
Creating a shape ............................................................................................................................ 157
4.12 Changing drawing objects................................................................................................................... 158
Dragging, reshaping and resizing drawing objects......................................................................... 158
Arranging drawing objects.............................................................................................................. 160
Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views.......................................................... 160
Listing hidden parts in drawings .............................................................................................. 163
Trimming ........................................................................................................................................ 163
Splitting........................................................................................................................................... 165
Dividing........................................................................................................................................... 166

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
 Modifying the shape of leader lines................................................................................................ 166
4.13 Using drawing tools ............................................................................................................................ 167
Aligning drawing objects ................................................................................................................ 167
Creating fillets ................................................................................................................................ 168
Creating chamfers.......................................................................................................................... 169
Copying with offsets ....................................................................................................................... 170
Managing moment connection symbols......................................................................................... 171
Creating moment connection symbols .................................................................................... 171
Updating moment connection symbols .................................................................................... 172
Deleting moment connection symbols ..................................................................................... 172
Managing cut lines ......................................................................................................................... 173
Creating cut lines ..................................................................................................................... 173
Updating cut lines .................................................................................................................... 173
Deleting cut lines ..................................................................................................................... 174
4.14 Grids in drawings ................................................................................................................................ 174
Modifying grid and grid line properties ........................................................................................... 174
Moving grid labels .......................................................................................................................... 175
Hiding grids or grid lines................................................................................................................. 175
4.15 Colors in drawings .............................................................................................................................. 175
Changing drawing color ................................................................................................................. 176
Specifying and using special color ................................................................................................. 178
Pen numbers in Color Table .......................................................................................................... 179
Changing the pen numbers for colors ..................................................................................... 179
4.16 User coordinate system (UCS) ........................................................................................................... 180
Setting a new UCS......................................................................................................................... 181
Toggling between two user coordinate systems ............................................................................ 181
Resetting UCS ............................................................................................................................... 181
4.17 Saving drawings ................................................................................................................................. 181
4.18 Closing drawings ................................................................................................................................ 182

5 Working with drawings ......................................................................... 183

5.1 Updating drawings when the model changes ..................................................................................... 183
5.2 Locking and unlocking drawings......................................................................................................... 184
5.3 Freezing drawings .............................................................................................................................. 184
Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings............................................................... 185
Freezing and unfreezing single part, cast unit and assembly drawings......................................... 185
How freezing affects drawings ....................................................................................................... 185
5.4 Issuing drawings ................................................................................................................................. 186
5.5 Deleting drawings ............................................................................................................................... 186
5.6 Revising drawings............................................................................................................................... 186

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 9
 Creating revisions........................................................................................................................... 187
Changing revisions......................................................................................................................... 187
Deleting revisions ........................................................................................................................... 188
5.7 Printing drawings................................................................................................................................. 188
Printing single drawings ................................................................................................................. 188
Example: Printing on A4 in landscape ..................................................................................... 189
Example: Printing on A3 in portrait .......................................................................................... 189
Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go ................................................................ 190
Printing to file.................................................................................................................................. 190
Customizing print file names .................................................................................................... 191
Switches for customizing print file names ................................................................................ 191
Creating PDF files .......................................................................................................................... 192
Printing settings.............................................................................................................................. 193
Printing to multiple sheets .............................................................................................................. 194
Drawing frames and foldmarks....................................................................................................... 195
Adding frames and foldmarks in printouts ............................................................................... 196
Using a DWG/DXF file as a frame ........................................................................................... 196
Setting up printer instances............................................................................................................ 197
Adding a printer instance ......................................................................................................... 197
Adding a print-to-file instance .................................................................................................. 197
Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance ........................................................................... 198
Paper size ................................................................................................................................ 199
Print area h*b ........................................................................................................................... 199
Colors and line weights in printing ........................................................................................... 199
Printing tips..................................................................................................................................... 200
5.8 Preview images of drawings ............................................................................................................... 200
Creating preview images................................................................................................................ 200
Adding preview images for master drawings.................................................................................. 201
Viewing preview images of drawing templates............................................................................... 201

6 Modifying automatic drawing settings................................................ 203

6.1 Updating project information ............................................................................................................... 204
6.2 Drawing properties.............................................................................................................................. 206
Modifying drawing properties on drawing level .............................................................................. 206
Modifying and saving drawing properties before creating drawings ........................................ 206
Modifying drawing properties of an existing drawing ............................................................... 207
Modifying drawing properties of several drawings ................................................................... 207
Modifying drawing properties on view level.................................................................................... 207
Modifying and saving properties on object level............................................................................. 208
Loading saved drawing object properties in an existing drawing ............................................. 208
Creating object level settings ......................................................................................................... 209
Applying object level settings on drawing level ........................................................................ 209

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
 Example: Applying object level settings on drawing level ....................................................... 210
Applying object level settings on view level ............................................................................. 212
How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties.......................................................................... 212
6.3 Drawing layout .................................................................................................................................... 213
Table layouts.................................................................................................................................. 214
Tables ............................................................................................................................................ 215
Creating a new layout .................................................................................................................... 215
Defining fixed sizes ................................................................................................................. 216
Defining calculated sizes ......................................................................................................... 216
Creating and adding a new table layout......................................................................................... 216
Setting margins and spaces for drawing views .............................................................................. 217
Adding tables in table layout .......................................................................................................... 217
If you replace a table in a table layout............................................................................................ 218
Setting the properties of tables in a table layout ............................................................................ 218
Key plans ....................................................................................................................................... 219
Adding a key plan in a table layout .......................................................................................... 220
Setting up a drawing view to be used as a key plan ............................................................... 220
Adding a DXG/DXF file in a table layout ........................................................................................ 220
Modifying tables in Template Editor ............................................................................................... 221
Selecting a new layout ................................................................................................................... 221
6.4 Drawing size and drawing view scale ................................................................................................. 222
Using exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size......................................................... 222
Using exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale......................................................... 223
Autoscaling and autosizing drawings ............................................................................................. 224
6.5 Automatic drawing views .................................................................................................................... 225
Selecting the views to create ......................................................................................................... 225
Selecting the view projection type.................................................................................................. 226
Setting the location of end views and section views ...................................................................... 228
Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings .................................................................... 230
Part orientation in drawing views ................................................................................................... 231
Coordinate system .................................................................................................................. 231
Changing the coordinate system ............................................................................................. 233
Rotating parts .......................................................................................................................... 233
Setting viewing direction for columns in assembly drawings ................................................... 235
Setting viewing direction for beams and bracings in assembly drawings ................................ 235
Showing neighbor parts in views.................................................................................................... 236
Shortening and lengthening parts .................................................................................................. 236
Shortening a part in the model ................................................................................................ 237
Lengthening a part in the model .............................................................................................. 237
Shortening parts in drawing views ........................................................................................... 237
Lengthening shortened parts in drawing views ....................................................................... 239
Unfolding polybeams...................................................................................................................... 239

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 11
 Undeforming deformed parts.......................................................................................................... 240
Showing part openings and recesses ............................................................................................ 241
Additional ways for showing symbols in openings and recesses ............................................ 242
Combining section views................................................................................................................ 243
Setting section view depth.............................................................................................................. 244
Setting section and end view direction ........................................................................................... 244
Showing section and end view direction marks ....................................................................... 245
Adding view labels for main and section views .............................................................................. 246
Modifying view label marks ...................................................................................................... 246
Displaying main view names automatically ............................................................................. 247
Modifying section marks................................................................................................................. 247
Setting the section mark cutting line............................................................................................... 248
6.6 Placement settings.............................................................................................................................. 249
Protected areas .............................................................................................................................. 249
Protecting areas in drawings .......................................................................................................... 251
Defining placement settings for annotation objects........................................................................ 251
Defining placement settings for dimensions................................................................................... 252
Defining free or fixed placement of views....................................................................................... 253
6.7 Automatic dimensions......................................................................................................................... 253
Adding automatic dimensions ........................................................................................................ 253
Adding automatic dual dimensions................................................................................................. 254
Setting dimension appearance....................................................................................................... 255
Setting dimension text, line and arrow appearance ................................................................. 255
Selecting the dimension type ................................................................................................... 255
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions .................................................................. 256
Selecting the dimension format, precision and units ............................................................... 256
Grouping large dimension values ............................................................................................ 257
Setting the dimension extension line length ............................................................................ 257
Creating exaggerated dimensions ........................................................................................... 259
Showing plate side marks automatically .................................................................................. 260
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions ................................................................................. 261
Example: Sloped dimension texts ............................................................................................ 261
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings................................................................................ 262
Object groups in dimensioning ................................................................................................ 262
Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines ........................................................ 262
Example: Grid and overall dimensions .................................................................................... 263
Example: Using maximum leader line length options .............................................................. 264
Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view ............................................................. 265
Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions ............................................................. 266
Example: Part dimension positioning ....................................................................................... 267
Example: Dimensions in anchor bolt plans .............................................................................. 275
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.......................................................... 278

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
 Creating minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts ............................................. 279
Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line ........................................................... 279
Modifying dimensions for unfolded parts ................................................................................. 280
Creating elevation dimensions ................................................................................................ 281
Dimensioning plates ................................................................................................................ 282
Dimensioning profiles .............................................................................................................. 284
Check dimensions ................................................................................................................... 285
Creating check dimensions ..................................................................................................... 285
Example: Part dimensioning .................................................................................................... 287
Example: Bolt dimensioning .................................................................................................... 290
Example: Position dimensioning ............................................................................................. 290
Example: Closing dimension ................................................................................................... 295
Example: Combining dimensions ............................................................................................ 296
Example: Combining bolt group dimensions ........................................................................... 299
Example: Forward offset ......................................................................................................... 300
Example: Recognizable distance ........................................................................................... 300
Example: Preferred dimension side ........................................................................................ 301
Example: Reinforcement dimension ........................................................................................ 302
6.8 Automatic marks ................................................................................................................................. 302
Adding automatic marks................................................................................................................. 303
Adding symbols in marks ........................................................................................................ 304
Adding templates in marks ...................................................................................................... 304
Adding user-defined attributes and template attributes in marks ............................................ 307
Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options .................................... 308
Adding pull-out pictures in reinforcement marks ..................................................................... 310
Setting mark appearance ............................................................................................................... 311
Setting the visibility of marks ................................................................................................... 311
Setting the appearance of mark text, frames and leader line ................................................. 312
Showing mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts ......................................................... 314
Mark location ........................................................................................................................... 315
Unit settings for mark elements ............................................................................................... 318
Merging marks automatically ......................................................................................................... 319
Merged part marks .................................................................................................................. 319
Merged reinforcement marks ................................................................................................... 321
6.9 Grids in drawings ................................................................................................................................ 323
Defining grid settings...................................................................................................................... 324
6.10 Parts and neighbor parts .................................................................................................................... 325
Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance .............................................................. 325
Part orientation............................................................................................................................... 326
Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings ............................. 326
Displaying compass direction ................................................................................................. 327
Displaying orientation marks (north marks) ............................................................................. 328

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 13
 Displaying connecting side marks ........................................................................................... 329
Example: Part representations ....................................................................................................... 330
6.11 Bolts .................................................................................................................................................... 332
Setting bolt contents and appearance............................................................................................ 332
Creating user-defined bolt symbols................................................................................................ 333
Example: Bolts ............................................................................................................................... 333
6.12 Surface treatments.............................................................................................................................. 335
Setting surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance ....................................................... 335
6.13 Reinforcement and meshes ................................................................................................................ 336
Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance........................................................... 336
Example: Hiding reinforcing bar lines............................................................................................. 336
Example: Reinforcement representation options ........................................................................... 337
6.14 Hatch patterns..................................................................................................................................... 338
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes................................................................................... 338
Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment .................................................................................. 340
Example: Insulation hatch patterns ................................................................................................ 341
6.15 Reference models............................................................................................................................... 342
Setting the visibility and appearance of reference models ............................................................. 342
Setting the visibility and line type of hidden lines using advanced options ................................... 342
6.16 User-defined attributes in drawings..................................................................................................... 344
Adding user-defined attributes ....................................................................................................... 344
6.17 Defining a firm folder for images and symbols .................................................................................... 345
6.18 Defining customized line types............................................................................................................ 345
6.19 Settings affecting the recreation of drawings ...................................................................................... 347
Preventing automatic drawing updates and recreation .................................................................. 348
6.20 Managing Master Drawing Catalog..................................................................................................... 348
Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog ..................................................................... 348
Adding saved settings .............................................................................................................. 348
Adding a rule set ...................................................................................................................... 349
Adding a cloning template ....................................................................................................... 350
Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog ...................................................... 350
Modifying master drawing properties ............................................................................................. 351
Modifying properties of saved settings .................................................................................... 351
Modifying rule set properties .................................................................................................... 351
Modifying properties and contents of wizard files .................................................................... 352
Wizard file contents ................................................................................................................. 352
Modifying cloning template properties ..................................................................................... 353
Managing folders............................................................................................................................ 354
Adding, renaming, and moving folders ................................................................................... 354
Copying master drawings to another folder ............................................................................. 354

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
 Removing master drawings from a folder ................................................................................ 355

7 Drawing settings.................................................................................... 357

7.1 View properties in drawings................................................................................................................ 357
7.2 Section view properties....................................................................................................................... 360
7.3 Dimension and dimensioning properties............................................................................................. 361
General dimension properties ........................................................................................................ 361
Dimension format, precision and unit properties............................................................................ 363
Dimension appearance properties ................................................................................................. 364
Advanced dimension properties..................................................................................................... 365
Dimension mark and dimension tag properties.............................................................................. 365
General dimensioning properties ................................................................................................... 366
Position dimensioning properties ................................................................................................... 368
Part dimensioning properties ......................................................................................................... 370
Bolt dimensioning properties.......................................................................................................... 371
Dimension grouping properties ...................................................................................................... 372
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties ......................................................................................... 373
Reinforcement dimensioning properties......................................................................................... 373
Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings)............................................................... 374
Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings) ................................................................................. 374
7.4 Mark properties................................................................................................................................... 376
Mark appearance properties .......................................................................................................... 376
Leader line types............................................................................................................................ 378
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks ....................................................... 378
Reinforcement mark merging properties........................................................................................ 379
Weld mark properties ..................................................................................................................... 380
Level mark properties..................................................................................................................... 381
7.5 Mark elements .................................................................................................................................... 382
Common elements in marks .......................................................................................................... 382
Part mark elements ........................................................................................................................ 383
Bolt mark elements ........................................................................................................................ 384
Reinforcement mark elements ....................................................................................................... 385
Reinforcement mesh mark elements ............................................................................................. 386
Elements in merged reinforcement marks ..................................................................................... 386
Connection mark elements ............................................................................................................ 387
Surface treatment mark elements .................................................................................................. 388
Section and detail mark elements .................................................................................................. 388
View, section view and detail view label mark elements................................................................ 389
7.6 Part and neighbor part properties ....................................................................................................... 389
Part and neighbor part content properties...................................................................................... 389
Part and neighbor part fill properties .............................................................................................. 391
Part and shape hatch pattern properties........................................................................................ 391

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 15
 7.7 Bolt properties..................................................................................................................................... 393
Bolt content properties ................................................................................................................... 393
7.8 Surface treatment visibility and content properties ............................................................................. 394
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties.................................................................................... 395
7.9 Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties.................................................................. 396
7.10 Reinforcement settings for drawings................................................................................................... 398
7.11 Placement properties for annotation objects....................................................................................... 403
7.12 Building object appearance properties................................................................................................ 403
7.13 Model weld visibility options................................................................................................................ 404
7.14 Properties of additional drawing objects ............................................................................................. 405
7.15 DWG/DXF scaling options .................................................................................................................. 406
7.16 Grid properties .................................................................................................................................... 407
7.17 Orientation settings ............................................................................................................................. 407

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
 1 Introduction to drawings

This section provides an overview of Tekla Structures drawing functionalities, and introduces
the main features. It also explains the various levels of editing drawings.
This section also explains the basic idea of integrating drawings to the model, and what it
means when we say that the drawings are associative and always up-to-date.
Furthermore, this section briefly introduces how the drawings may look like through some
examples of the contents.

Contents Main features in drawings (p. 17)

Screen layout (p. 18)
Drawing contents (p. 19)
Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)

1.1 Main features in drawings

Tekla Structures includes the following features for drawings:
• All information comes directly from the model, which minimizes the work you have to do.
In many cases all you need to do is to check the predefined settings or do some minor
editing.
• Up-to-date drawings. The drawings are actually part of the model. If you revise the model,
Tekla Structures also updates the drawings, so they are always up to date.
• Master Drawing Catalog, which is a fast, efficient and controlled way of creating
drawings in one centralized location using master drawings.
• Automatic workshop single-part and assembly drawings, and cast unit drawings of
selected parts with predefined settings for layout, views, dimensions, marks, and building
objects.
• Automatic general arrangement drawings and anchor bolt plans of selected views.
• Drawing cloning capabilities.
• Revision control for drawings.
• Interactive editing tools that you can use for adding dimensions, various shapes, texts,
additional annotations, symbols, and links in the drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 17
Introduction to drawings
 • Standard and customized drawing layouts. Tekla Structures contains many ready-to-use
standard drawing layouts. You can also create your own.
• Export capabilities.

See also Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)
Drawing types (p. 27)
Exporting drawings to DWG/DXF
Introduction to drawings (p. 17)

1.2 Screen layout

When you open a drawing, Tekla Structures activates the drawing mode. The menus and icons
for the modeling mode are replaced by those of the drawing mode. The model views remain on
the screen behind the drawing. The following illustration identifies the various areas of the
drawing window:

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Introduction to drawings
 Menus contain all commands available in the drawing mode.

Basic tools for working with drawings.

Commands for creating dimensions and objects.

Select switches determine the selectable objects.

Snap settings control which points you can snap to and pick.

See also Introduction to drawings (p. 17)

Filtering in drawings
Interface overview
Snap switches
Selection switches

1.3 Drawing contents

The drawing is made up of three main types of elements: drawing layout, drawing views, and
drawing objects. In the following we will introduce these elements. You can select what to
include in the drawing before you create it, and also add objects in an existing drawing.

See also Introduction to drawings (p. 17)

Drawing layout and views (p. 19)
Drawing objects (p. 20)

Drawing layout and views

A Tekla Structures drawing consists of two types of basic elements:
• The layout defines the drawing size and the included tables, such as revision tables, title
blocks, material lists, bills of material, general notes, key plans and DWG files. Tekla
Structures has a range of predefined layouts, and you can also create layouts of your own.
• Drawing views are views to the whole model, to a part of the model or to individual parts
in the model. Views can show building objects from different directions (top, front, back,
bottom). Drawing views act as containers for the building objects or areas in the model that
you have selected to be included in the drawing.
Below is an example of the drawing layout and views.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 19
Introduction to drawings
 Top view to a part

Front view to a part

Material list

Drawing title block

See also Drawing contents (p. 19)

Drawing objects
Drawing views may contain several types of objects. Some of them come from the model and
represent something that will exist in the real building or will be closely related to it. Others are
objects that represent information that is only relevant in the drawing, or that add extra
information to the information in the model. Drawings may include the following object types:
• Building objects: parts, bolts, welds, chamfers, reinforcing bars, or surface treatment
• Associative annotation objects: dimensions, marks, associative notes
• Independent annotation objects that are not linked to the model: text, text files, symbols,
link, hyperlinks, DWG/DXF files, and reference models
• Additional drawing objects: shapes (clouds, lines, rectangles, etc.)

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Introduction to drawings
 Clouds and rectangles

Dimensions

Marks, associative notes

Building objects

See also Drawing contents (p. 19)

1.4 Basic principles of drawings

There are a couple of basic principles in Tekla Structures that you need to understand before
you start creating or modifying drawings:
• The model is the single source of information for drawings. The drawing is just another
view to the model, usually a 2D view. This ensures that the information in drawings and
reports is always up-to-date.
• Tekla Structures integrates the drawings with the model.
• Drawing objects are associated with model objects, and updated when the model changes.
• Changing some of the properties requires the recreation of the drawings.
• You can modify drawing properties on three levels; drawing, view and object level,
depending on the desired result.

See also Introduction to drawings (p. 17)

Integrated drawings (p. 22)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 21
Introduction to drawings
 Drawing associativity (p. 23)
How drawings are updated (p. 22)
Three levels of modifying drawings (p. 24)
Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (p. 347)

Integrated drawings
Tekla Structures integrates the drawings with the model. A drawing is a window to the model
presenting 3D structures in 2D. The building objects shown in the drawing are model objects
you create in the model. You can change their representation in the drawing but you cannot
change the geometry or the location of the building object, or delete building objects; all
changes to building objects are made in the model. That is why the drawings are always up-to-
date. For example, dimensions and marks in drawings are always correct. However, you can
filter out parts and bolts in drawings using the filtering tools, or make them invisible by hiding
them.
You can create drawings at any stage of the project. If the model changes, Tekla Structures
notifies in the Drawing List that you need to update the related drawings. You cannot open a
drawing that is not up-to-date.

See also Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)

How drawings are updated

When a model changes, the related drawings need to be updated. Tekla Structures takes care of
updating and notifies you if updating is needed.

When you start using a newer version of Tekla Structures, updating

drawings created with the older version may cause problems. We
recommend that you complete any drawings you have started using the
older version, or recreate the drawings using your new version of Tekla
Structures.

Updating is necessary, when:

• The geometry of a model object changes.
• Some other model object properties, for example, material and class change.
• Model objects are added or deleted.
• The number of identical model objects changes.
Tekla Structures automatically updates drawings each time you number the model. If you have
not numbered the model, you are prompted to do so when you create a drawing. Furthermore, if
you have changed the model and go to the Drawing List to open drawings, Tekla Structures has
marked the outdated drawings, and you need to update them before you can open them.
General arrangement drawings are always updated when you open them if the model has
changed. You do not need to number general arrangement drawings.

See also Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)

Updating drawings when the model changes (p. 183)
Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (p. 347)
Numbering the model

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Introduction to drawings
Drawing associativity
Tekla Structures drawings are associative. The objects in the drawing are linked to model
objects, which means that most objects in the drawing are automatically updated when the
model changes. For example, if a model object is resized, dimension points move with the
corresponding object in the drawing, and the dimensions are recalculated. Still you do not lose
any manual changes that you have made in the drawing. This applies to all drawing types.
Tekla Structures updates the following drawing objects to reflect the changes in the model:
• Parts
• Marks
• Dimensions
• Welds
• Views
• Section marks
• Detail marks
• Associative notes
• Lines and other shapes
• Tables
Tekla Structures retains the following manual changes made to drawings:
• Base points of objects; for example, if you drag an object to a new location
• Object properties; for example, color, font, and line type

See also Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)

Associativity symbol (p. 23)

Associativity symbol
In drawings, the associativity symbol indicates which drawing objects are associative and
automatically updated. Associativity symbols are shown only when you select a drawing
object, for example, a dimension.

Objects that do not have valid association get a ghost associativity symbol and a question mark.
These symbols are shown constantly, even though the dimension is not selected. This makes it
easier to find objects that need attention.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 23
Introduction to drawings
 The associativity symbols are not shown in printed drawings.

To hide associativity symbols in drawing views, click Tools > Options >
Associative Symbol (Shift + A).

See also Drawing associativity (p. 23)

Three levels of modifying drawings

In Tekla Structures, you can modify drawings on three levels, depending on how permanent
and extensive modifications are needed.
• On the highest level, you can change the drawing properties on the drawing level. This
way you can change the properties of all building objects, marks, dimensions, and views in
the drawing. For example, you can define that all parts are displayed in blue color in a
drawing. When you save the drawing property settings in drawing property files, you can
use the same settings later for other drawings of the same type. You can modify the
drawing properties of the selected drawing type in the model before you create the
drawing. You can also change the drawing properties in an existing drawing that you have
opened. Settings propagate to all views and objects in that drawing, except new views that
you create after the drawing is created.
• The second level is to modify the properties on the view level. The modifications apply
only to the view that you have selected in an open drawing. Settings propagate to all
objects in that one view.
• The third and lowest level is to modify the properties on the object level, where you
change the properties of the selected objects in an open drawing. Settings are for that one
object only; however, you can select and modify many objects at a time. The properties
modified on the object level are no longer affected by property changes on view or
drawing level.
• By saving the object property settings and combining them with drawing or view filters
and drawing object types into detailed object level settings, you can also apply the object
properties on the drawing and view level. When doing so, the object level settings override
the property settings made in the drawing property dialog boxes on the view and drawing
level. Object level settings applied on the drawing level are inherited to the view level
settings if there are no object level settings defined on the view level. If you apply object
level settings on the view level, they override the drawing level settings.
• The recommended way of working is to work from the top down, from drawing level to
object level. Once you change properties on the view level you should not go to the
drawing level properties and modify drawing properties there, otherwise you
modifications on the view level will be lost. The modifications made on the drawing level
also remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change, for example.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Introduction to drawings
See also Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)
Modifying drawing properties on drawing level (p. 206)
Modifying drawing properties on view level (p. 207)
Modifying and saving properties on object level (p. 208)
Creating object level settings (p. 209)
Applying object level settings on drawing level (p. 209)
Applying object level settings on view level (p. 212)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 25
Introduction to drawings
26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Introduction to drawings
 2 Creating drawings

This section explains how to create different types of drawings, in different ways.
Once you complete a model, you can start creating drawings to issue.

Contents Drawing types (p. 27)

Before creating drawings (p. 48)
Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)
Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands (p. 65)
Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (p. 69)
Cloning drawings (p. 53)

2.1 Drawing types

You can create many types of drawings in Tekla Structures according to your needs. This
section introduces the available types.

See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Single-part drawings (p. 34)
Assembly drawings (p. 40)
Cast unit drawings (p. 44)
Multidrawings (p. 47)
Creating drawings (p. 27)

General arrangement drawings

Create general arrangement (GA) drawings when you need
• Several views in one drawing, including the entire model or a part of it
• Plan drawings (foundation, floor, deck layout, and anchor bolt plans)
• Erection elevation drawings
• Information from model views, including 3D views

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 27
Creating drawings
 General arrangement drawings show the model from the most suitable direction. For example,
in plan drawings, you are looking from the top of a building or floor down towards the ground.
In elevation drawings you are looking from one of the sides of the building, like along a grid
line. GA drawings often contain enlarged views of complex areas or details, and other
additional information that helps in the approval process and during the installation phase.

See also Drawing types (p. 27)

Example: Foundation plan (p. 28)
Example: Slab plan (p. 28)
Example: Framing plan (p. 29)
Example: Deck plan (p. 30)
Example: Erection elevation drawing (p. 31)
Example: 3D isometric drawing (p. 32)
Example: Anchor bolt plan (p. 33)
Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Example: Foundation plan

See below for an example of a foundation plan.

See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: Slab plan

See below for an example of a slab plan.

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: Framing plan

See below for an example of a basement level framing plan.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 29
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: Deck plan

See below for an example of a deck plan.

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: Erection elevation drawing

See below for an example of an elevation erection elevation drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 31
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: 3D isometric drawing

See below for an example of an isometric drawing.

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: Anchor bolt plan

See below for an example of an anchor bolt plan.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 33
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Single-part drawings
Single-part drawings are workshop drawings that show the fabrication information for one part
(usually without welds).
Single-part drawings usually use small sheet sizes, for example, A4 or imperial standard size
8.5" x 11.5".

See also Drawing types (p. 27)

Example: Anchor bolt (p. 34)
Example: Embed (p. 35)
Example: Plate (p. 36)
Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Example: Anchor bolt

See below for an example of a single-part drawing presenting an anchor bolt.

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
See also Single-part drawings (p. 34)

Example: Embed
See below for an example of a single-part drawing presenting an embed.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 35
Creating drawings
See also Single-part drawings (p. 34)

Example: Plate
See below for examples of single-part drawings presenting plates.

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 37
Creating drawings
38 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
See also S